WO2021233328A1 - 一种通信方法及装置 - Google Patents

一种通信方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021233328A1
WO2021233328A1 PCT/CN2021/094582 CN2021094582W WO2021233328A1 WO 2021233328 A1 WO2021233328 A1 WO 2021233328A1 CN 2021094582 W CN2021094582 W CN 2021094582W WO 2021233328 A1 WO2021233328 A1 WO 2021233328A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
communication device
resource
drx
information
configuration information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/094582
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
刘俊
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to BR112022023575A priority Critical patent/BR112022023575A2/pt
Priority to EP21809284.9A priority patent/EP4152831A4/en
Publication of WO2021233328A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021233328A1/zh
Priority to US17/990,296 priority patent/US20230082194A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0212—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave
    • H04W52/0216—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is master and terminal is slave using a pre-established activity schedule, e.g. traffic indication frame
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28—Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/40—Resource management for direct mode communication, e.g. D2D or sidelink
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/50—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/54—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria
    • H04W72/542—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria using measured or perceived quality
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00—Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/16—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices
    • H04W92/18—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices between terminal devices
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • the new radio (NR) system is the current mainstream wireless communication technology. It aims to support V2X with lower latency and higher reliability in response to the characteristics of the vehicle to everything (V2X) service and new service transmission requirements. Communication.
  • the receiving terminal equipment (RX UE) will always monitor the sidelink control information (SCI) to check whether there is information from the transmitting terminal equipment (TX UE).
  • SCI sidelink control information
  • the RX UE is not always interacting with the TX UE for effective information. Then, when there is no data interaction between the sending and receiving UEs, if the RX UE continues to monitor the SCI, it will increase the power consumption of the RX UE.
  • This application provides a communication method and device to save the power consumption of the RX UE.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a communication system, and the communication system can be applied to a side link communication system, such as a car networking system.
  • the method may include: the first communication device determines the first candidate resource and the first service for side link transmission; the first communication device determines the first resource from the first candidate resources; the first resource and the first activation period are between There is an intersection in the time domain, and the first activation period is determined according to the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service.
  • the first communication device selects a resource that has an intersection with the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service as the reserved resource, and uses the reserved resource for side link transmission, which can ensure that the first communication device can activate
  • the transmission from the second communication device (such as the TX UE) is received during the period, which saves the power consumption of the RX UE and ensures the side link transmission between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the first communication device determines the first resource from the first candidate resources, including: the first communication device stores the first candidate resources in the time domain and the first active period.
  • the intersected resource is determined to be the second candidate resource; the first communication device determines the first resource from the second candidate resource.
  • the first communication device determines a resource that overlaps with the first activation period in the time domain among the first candidate resources as the second candidate resource, including: The resources included in the first activation period in the time domain among the first candidate resources are determined as the second candidate resources.
  • the first communication device uses the first resource to start the side chain Before channel transmission, the second service can also be selected from the first service. At this time, the first communication device can select a destination ID whose DRX activation period and the first resource overlap in the time domain from the above multiple destination IDs. .
  • the above method may further include: the first communication device determines the first activation period; the first communication device Monitor the SCI during the first activation period; here, the SCI is used to indicate resources used by other UEs for side link transmission.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device after determining the first activation period, indicates the first activation period to the physical layer of the first communication device, and the physical layer monitors the SCI sent by other UEs during the first activation period, and then The physical layer measures during the first active period.
  • the first communication device determines the union of the DRX activation period in the time domain in at least one DRX configuration, that is, the first activation period.
  • at least one DRX configuration may be the first activation period.
  • the first communication device performs measurement during the first activation period.
  • the aforementioned measurement may include measuring PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP; alternatively, measuring S-RSSI.
  • the PSCCH-RSRP is obtained by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSCCH
  • the PSSCH-RSRP is obtained by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSSCH.
  • the first communication device monitors the SCI sent by other UEs during the first activation period, then the resource indicated by the SCI is within the first activation period, then the first communication device measures the resource indicated by the SCI , It can also be considered that the measurement is performed during the first activation period.
  • the first communication device may also perform resource exclusion.
  • the first communication device may perform resource exclusion.
  • the MAC layer of a communication device first indicates to the physical layer the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service and/or the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service, that is, In the first activation period, then, the physical layer excludes resources from the second resources, and determines resources that overlap with the above-mentioned union as the first candidate resource.
  • the first candidate resource needs to meet at least one of the following conditions: There is an intersection between the above and the union of the DRX activation periods corresponding to the first service; in the time domain, there is an intersection with the union of the DRX activation periods corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service.
  • the second resource can be the resource corresponding to the resource determined by the physical layer through sensing in the selection window, or the resource corresponding to the resource in the selection window after the physical layer has excluded resources from the resource determined by sensing.
  • the physical layer may further exclude resources from the aforementioned first candidate resources.
  • the present application provides a communication method that can be applied to a communication system, and the communication system can be applied to a side-link communication system, such as an Internet of Vehicles system.
  • the method may include: in a scenario where the first service includes multiple destination IDs, before the first communication device uses the first resource to start side link transmission, it may also select the second service from the first service. In this case, the first The communication device may select a destination ID that has an intersection between the corresponding DRX activation period and the first resource in the time domain from the above multiple destination IDs.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can be applied to a communication system, and the communication system can be applied to a side-link communication system, such as an Internet of Vehicles system.
  • the method may include: the first communication device determines a second activation period; the first communication device monitors the SCI during the second activation period;
  • the SCI is used to indicate resources used by other UEs for side link transmission.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device after determining the second activation period, indicates the second activation period to the physical layer of the first communication device, and the physical layer monitors the SCI sent by other UEs during the second activation period, and then The physical layer measures during the second activation period.
  • the first communication device determines the union of the DRX activation period in the time domain in the at least one DRX configuration, that is, the second activation period.
  • at least one DRX configuration may be the first A part or all of the DRX configuration that a communication device can determine. It can be understood that the at least one DRX configuration may include the DRX configuration of the first service.
  • the first communication device performs sensing during the second activation period and demodulates the SCI of other UEs to learn the resource occupancy status of other UEs.
  • the first communication device selects resources that have an intersection with the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service (that is, the second activation period) as the reserved resources, and uses the reserved resources for side link transmission, which can guarantee
  • the first communication device can receive the transmission from the second communication device (such as the TX UE) during the activation period, which saves the power consumption of the RX UE and ensures the side link transmission between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the first communication device may perform measurement during the second activation period according to the SCI, that is, perform measurement on the resource indicated by the SCI.
  • the aforementioned “measurement” may include measuring PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP; alternatively, measuring S-RSSI.
  • the PSCCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSCCH
  • the PSSCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSSCH.
  • the first communication device monitors the SCI during the second activation period, then the resource indicated by the SCI is in the second activation period, then the first communication device measures the resource indicated by the SCI, which can also be considered It is measured during the second activation period.
  • the first communication device may also determine the first candidate resource and the second candidate resource for side link transmission.
  • a service the first communication device determines the first resource from the first candidate resources.
  • the first communication device determines the first resource from the first candidate resources, including: the first communication device stores the first candidate resources in the time domain and the second active period.
  • the intersected resource is determined to be the second candidate resource; the first communication device determines the first resource from the second candidate resource.
  • the first communication device determines, as the second candidate resource, a resource that overlaps the second activation period in the time domain among the first candidate resources, including: The resources included in the second activation period in the time domain among the first candidate resources are determined to be the second candidate resources.
  • the first communication device uses the first resource to start the side chain Before channel transmission, you can also select the first service, that is, the destination ID. At this time, the first communication device can select from the above multiple destination IDs that the corresponding DRX activation period and the first resource overlap in the time domain.
  • the destination ID (used to identify the second service), that is to say, there is an intersection in the time domain between the activation period corresponding to the last selected destination ID and the reserved resources.
  • the first communication device may also perform resource exclusion.
  • the first communication device may exclude resources.
  • the MAC layer of a communication device first indicates to the physical layer the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service and/or the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service, that is, In the second activation period, the physical layer then excludes the resources from the second resources, and determines the resources that overlap with the above-mentioned union as the third candidate resource, that is, the third candidate resource needs to meet at least one of the following conditions: There is an intersection in the domain of the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service; in the time domain, there is an intersection with the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service. It is understandable that the third candidate resource can be used as the above-mentioned first candidate resource.
  • the physical layer can also further execute the method described in S803 from the third candidate resource to determine the first candidate resource.
  • the second resource can be the resource corresponding to the resource determined by the physical layer through sensing in the selection window, or the resource corresponding to the resource in the selection window after the physical layer has excluded resources from the resource determined by sensing.
  • the present application provides a communication method that can be applied to a communication system, and the communication system can be applied to a side-link communication system, such as an Internet of Vehicles system.
  • the method may include: the first communication device determines the fourth resource; the first communication device determines the third candidate resource from the fourth resource; here, the third candidate resource needs to meet at least one of the following conditions: The union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the service has an intersection; in the time domain, there is an intersection with the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device when the first communication device performs resource exclusion in the selection window, the MAC layer of the first communication device first indicates to the physical layer the union and sum of the DRX activation periods corresponding to the first service. / Or the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service, that is, the first activation period, and then the physical layer excludes resources from the fourth resource, and determines the union with the above Resources that have an intersection are used as the third candidate resource, that is, the third candidate resource needs to meet at least one of the following conditions: there is an intersection in the time domain with the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service; There is an intersection between the current business in a business and the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the non-periodic business in the historical business.
  • the physical layer may further exclude resources from the third candidate resource, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the fourth resource may be a resource in the selection window, or a resource left after the resource in the selection window is excluded.
  • the first communication device selects a resource that has an intersection with the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service as the reserved resource, and uses the reserved resource for side link transmission, which can ensure that the first communication device can be activated
  • the transmission from the second communication device (such as the TX UE) is received during the period, which saves the power consumption of the RX UE and ensures the side link transmission between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the above method further includes: the first communication device determines the first activation period; Monitor the SCI during the first activation period.
  • the SCI is used to indicate resources used by other UEs for side link transmission.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device after determining the second activation period, indicates the second activation period to the physical layer of the first communication device, and the physical layer monitors the SCI sent by other UEs during the second activation period, and then The physical layer measures during the first active period.
  • the first communication device determines the union of the DRX activation period in the time domain in the at least one DRX configuration, that is, the first activation period.
  • at least one DRX configuration may be the first activation period.
  • the first communication device may also determine the third candidate resource and the second candidate resource for side link transmission. A service; the first communication device determines the fifth resource from the third candidate resource.
  • the first communication device determines the first resource from the third candidate resource, including: the first communication device makes the third candidate resource exist in the time domain with the first active period The intersection resource is determined to be the fourth candidate resource; the first communication device determines the first resource from the fourth candidate resource.
  • the first communication device determines a resource that overlaps the first activation period in the time domain among the third candidate resources as the fourth candidate resource, including: the first communication device Among the third candidate resources, the resources included in the first activation period in the time domain are determined to be the fourth candidate resources.
  • the first communication in order to improve the degree of matching between reserved resources and the DRX activation period of the first service, in the scenario of multiple destination IDs, the first communication Before the device uses the fifth resource to start side link transmission, it can also select the first service, that is, the communication destination. At this time, the first communication device can select the corresponding DRX activation period and the fifth destination ID from multiple destination IDs.
  • the resource has an overlapping destination ID in the time domain, and the communication destination identified by the selected destination ID is the selected second service, that is, the DRX activation period corresponding to the last selected destination ID and the reserved resource are in the time domain There is an intersection.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a communication system, and the communication system can be applied to a side link communication system, such as an Internet of Vehicles system.
  • the method may include: the first communication device determines a second activation period, the second activation period is the union of the DRX activation period in the time domain in at least one discontinuous reception DRX configuration; the first communication device monitors in the second activation period Side link control information SCI, SCI is used to indicate resources used by other communication devices for side link transmission;
  • the first communication device performs measurement in the second activation period according to the SCI.
  • At least one DRX configuration includes the DRX configuration of the first service.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can be applied to a communication system, and the communication system can be applied to a side-link communication system, such as an Internet of Vehicles system.
  • the method may include: the first communication device determines a fourth resource for side link transmission; the first communication device determines a third candidate resource from the fourth resource, and the third candidate resource satisfies at least one of the following conditions: There is an intersection in the union of the discontinuous reception DRX activation periods corresponding to the first service.
  • the first service includes the current service and/or the historical service; the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service and the non-periodic service in the historical service in the time domain There is an intersection between the unions of, where the third candidate resource is used to determine the fifth resource used for side link transmission.
  • the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service includes at least one of the following: DRX activation period corresponding to the communication target, DRX activation period corresponding to the side link connection, and DRX activation period corresponding to the logical channel Period, the DRX activation period corresponding to the resource pool, the DRX activation period corresponding to the side link service, the DRX activation period corresponding to the MAC PDU of the media access control layer protocol data unit, and the DRX activation period corresponding to the transport block TB.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can be applied to a communication system, and the communication system can be applied to a side-link communication system, such as an Internet of Vehicles system.
  • the method may include: the first communication device determines a third resource for side link transmission; if the third resource does not have an intersection with the discontinuous reception DRX activation period corresponding to the fourth service of the first communication device, then the first communication The device triggers resource reselection.
  • the seventh aspect there is no overlap between the DRX activation periods corresponding to the third resource and the fourth service, including: the union of multiple DRX activation periods corresponding to the third resource and the fourth service does not exist Intersection; or, there is no intersection between the third resource and at least one DRX activation period of the multiple DRX activation periods corresponding to the first service; or, the third resource and the multiple DRX activation periods corresponding to the fourth service meet the requirements It is assumed that there is no overlap between the number of DRX activation periods.
  • the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service includes at least one of the following: DRX activation period corresponding to the communication target, DRX activation period corresponding to the side link connection, DRX activation period, DRX activation period corresponding to the side link link, DRX activation period corresponding to the logical channel, DRX activation period corresponding to the resource pool, DRX activation period corresponding to the side link service, media access control layer protocol data unit MAC PDU The corresponding DRX activation period, the DRX activation period corresponding to the transport block TB.
  • the first communication device may also configure the period for the third resource. Then, the first communication device may configure the DRX period that satisfies the second condition in the DRX configuration corresponding to the fourth service ( That is, DRX cycle is configured as the cycle corresponding to the third resource.
  • the second condition may include: the minimum value of the DRX cycle in the DRX configuration corresponding to the fourth service, the DRX cycle in the DRX configuration corresponding to the first service is less than a preset threshold, and the DRX cycle in the DRX configuration corresponding to the fourth service is less than 20% Etc.
  • the second condition may also be other conditions, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the period of the first resource is selected as the minimum value of the period of all DRX configurations corresponding to the fourth service, so that the period of the first communication device waking up to monitor the SCI is the same as the period of sending the fourth service. Match, thereby improving the probability of effective utilization of side link resources.
  • the first communication device can perform the seventh aspect and any of its possible implementations when evaluating the selected third resource.
  • the first communication device may evaluate the third resource (that is, the reserved resource selected by the first communication device), if the first communication device determines that there is no intersection between the third resource and the DRX activation period corresponding to the fourth service of the first communication device ,
  • the first communication device triggers resource reselection to reselect resources that overlap with the DRX activation period of the first service.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can be applied to a communication system, and the communication system can be applied to a side-link communication system, such as an Internet of Vehicles system.
  • the method may include: the first communication device may configure the cycle for the resource, then the first communication device may configure the DRX cycle (ie DRX cycle) that satisfies the second condition in the DRX configuration corresponding to the fifth service of the first communication device as The period corresponding to this resource.
  • the second condition may include: the minimum value of the DRX cycle in the DRX configuration corresponding to the fifth service, the DRX cycle in the DRX configuration corresponding to the first service is less than a preset threshold, and the DRX cycle in the DRX configuration corresponding to the first service is less than 20% Etc.
  • the second condition may also be other conditions, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first communication device selects the period of the selected resource as the minimum value of the period of all DRX configurations corresponding to the fifth service, so that the first communication device wakes up to monitor the period of the SCI and the period of the fifth service transmission. Therefore, the probability of effective utilization of side link resources is improved.
  • the first communication device can perform the method described in the eighth aspect and any of its possible implementation manners when configuring a resource period .
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can be applied to a communication system, and the communication system can be applied to a side link communication system, such as an Internet of Vehicles system.
  • the method may include: the first communication device determines that the first resource pool or the resources in the first resource pool satisfy the third condition; the first communication device performs DRX configuration, and/or the first communication device instructs the second communication device to perform DRX configuration , So that the first communication device selects a resource pool that can be used for side link transmission.
  • the first resource pool is the resource pool for which the first communication device currently performs resource selection
  • the third condition includes: the channel busy ratio (CBR) of the current resource pool satisfies the fourth condition.
  • the fourth condition may be that the CBR is greater than the preset value (can be Experience value) or CBR is within the preset range
  • the first communication device triggers resource pool reselection and/or the packet loss rate meets the fifth condition.
  • the fifth condition may be that the packet loss rate is greater than the preset value (experience value can be used), Or the packet loss rate is within the preset range, etc.
  • the third condition may further include one or a combination of the following conditions: CBR satisfies the fourth condition and reaches the first threshold, the number of times the first communication device triggers resource pool reselection reaches the second threshold, The number of times that the packet loss rate of the second communication device meets the fifth condition reaches the third threshold.
  • the first threshold, the second threshold, and the third threshold may be empirical values.
  • the first communication device after determining that the first resource pool or the resources in the first resource pool meet the third condition, performs DRX configuration so that the first communication device selects a resource pool that can be used for side link transmission.
  • DRX configuration can be understood as DRX configuration based on reserved resources, for example, DRX reconfiguration based on reserved resources, so that the reserved resources are activated in the time domain with the reconfigured DRX There is an overlap between the periods; or, the DRX initial allocation is performed according to the reserved resources, so that the reserved resources overlap with the configured DRX activation period in the time domain.
  • the first communication device instructs the second communication device to select a resource pool that can be used for side link transmission.
  • the first communication device sends a first indication message to the second communication device, and the first indication message is used to notify the second communication device of the current resource pool or current resource pool of the first communication device.
  • the resources in the resource pool meet the third condition; or, the first communication device sends a second indication message to the second communication device, the second indication message is used to instruct the second communication device to perform DRX configuration; and/or, the first communication device Send a third indication message to the second communication device, where the third indication message is used to indicate DRX configuration information.
  • the first communication device may also receive a fourth indication message from the second communication device (RX UE), and the fourth indication message is used for Indicates that the packet loss rate or the packet loss rate satisfies the fifth condition.
  • the fifth condition may be that the packet loss rate is greater than a preset value (which may be an empirical value), or the packet loss rate is within a preset range.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to a communication system, and the communication system can be applied to a side link communication system, such as an Internet of Vehicles system.
  • the method may include: if the first discontinuously received DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information, the first communication device sends the first information to the second communication device, and/or sends the second information to the third communication device ; Wherein, the first DRX configuration information is used for the first side link corresponding to the first communication device, the first resource configuration information is used for the second side link corresponding to the first communication device, and the first information is used to indicate the second communication The device performs DRX configuration for the first side link, and the second information is used to instruct the third communication device to perform resource configuration for the second side link.
  • the first side link may be one or more side links
  • the second side link may also be one or more side links.
  • the first side link is a side link
  • the second side link and the first side link may be the same side link, or the second side link and the first side link may be different Side link
  • the second side link can be one or more of the first side links, that is, the second side link is the first side link Part of the side links or all of the side links in the link.
  • the DRX activation period indicated by the first DRX configuration information and the time zone indicated by the first resource configuration information may be There may be conflicts in one or more time periods. At this time, it can be said that the first DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information.
  • one time period may refer to a time slot corresponding to a time domain interval that has occurred, or may refer to a time slot corresponding to a time domain interval that has not occurred.
  • the DRX activation period indicated by the first DRX configuration information and the time domain interval indicated by the first resource configuration information conflict in one time period, including: n time slots in which the DRX activation period overlaps the time domain interval
  • the number is less than the preset threshold, and n is a positive integer.
  • the number of timeslots in the n DRX activation period overlapping the time domain interval is less than the preset threshold, including: the number of overlapping timeslots divided by n times the number of timeslots in the DRX activation period is less than the preset threshold.
  • the first communication device determines that the SL resource does not match the SL DRX, it sends the first information to the second communication device and/or sends the second information to the third communication device, so that the second communication device
  • the SL resource configured by the communication device and/or the third communication device matches the SL DRX.
  • the first resource configuration information is the current resource configuration information of the first communication device; the above method further includes: the first communication device receives the first DRX configuration information from the second communication device ; The first communication device determines that the first DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information.
  • the first communication device is a sending terminal device
  • the second communication device is a receiving terminal device
  • the third communication device is a network device to which the sending terminal device belongs; wherein, the first resource configuration
  • the information can be used to indicate the resources configured by the base station for the sending terminal device in mode1, and can also be used to indicate the resource pool corresponding to the sending terminal device in mode2.
  • the first communication device is a receiving terminal device
  • the second communication device is a sending terminal device
  • the third communication device is a network device to which the receiving terminal device belongs; wherein, the first resource configuration The information is used to indicate the receiving resource corresponding to the receiving terminal device in mode2, and the receiving resource is used for the first side link.
  • the first communication device is a receiving terminal device
  • the third communication device is a sending terminal device
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the receiving terminal device belongs; wherein, the first resource configuration The information includes resource configuration information used to instruct the receiving terminal device to sense.
  • the first communication device may be an auxiliary user equipment
  • the second communication device may be a network device to which the auxiliary user equipment belongs
  • the third communication device may be an assisted user equipment; wherein, the first resource configuration information includes instructions for indicating the second A resource configuration information perceived by a communication device.
  • the first communication device is a receiving terminal device
  • the second communication device is a sending terminal device
  • the third communication device is a network device to which the receiving terminal device belongs
  • the first resource configuration information is used for
  • the receiving terminal device serves as the second side link between the sending terminal device and other terminal devices (ie, the fourth communication device)
  • the first resource configuration information is used to instruct the receiving terminal device to send the side link on the second side link Data
  • the first resource configuration information is used to instruct the receiving terminal device to send side link data to other terminal devices.
  • the first communication device is a receiving terminal device
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the receiving terminal device belongs
  • the third communication device is a sending terminal device; wherein, the first resource configuration The information is used to indicate one or more resource sets corresponding to the receiving terminal device.
  • the first communication device may be an assisted user equipment
  • the second communication device may be a network device to which the assisted user equipment belongs
  • the third communication device may be an auxiliary user equipment; wherein the first resource configuration information is used to indicate the assisted user equipment One or more resource sets corresponding to the auxiliary user equipment.
  • the first communication device sending the second information to the third communication device includes: the first communication device sends mode switching request information to the third communication device, and the mode switching request information is used for Request the third communication device to switch the resource allocation mode of the first communication device from the first mode to the second mode; or, the first communication device sends resource configuration request information to the third communication device; wherein the resource configuration request information includes at least the following One type: used to indicate the request reason for the mismatch between the DRX configuration information and the resource configuration information, the first DRX configuration information, the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, the expected resource configuration information or the resource adjustment amount.
  • the resource allocation mode of the first communication device includes mode1 and mode2.
  • the first mode is mode1, and the second mode is mode2; or, the first mode is mode2, and the second resource is mode1.
  • the base station allocates SL transmission resources to the transmitting terminal device through scheduling; in mode2, the terminal device autonomously selects transmission resources from a resource pool pre-configured or configured by the base station according to needs, without the base station for scheduling.
  • sending the first information by the first communication device to the second communication device may include: the first communication device sends DRX configuration failure information to the second communication device.
  • the DRX configuration failure information includes at least one of the following: third information used to indicate a failure of the DRX configuration, identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information, a configuration failure type used to indicate that the DRX configuration information does not match the resource configuration information,
  • the second communication device is not allowed to configure the DRX effective duration, the first resource configuration information, the desired DRX configuration information, the DRX adjustment amount, and the corresponding identification information for the first communication device.
  • the first communication device sending DRX configuration failure information to the second communication device includes: the first communication device receives the DRX configuration failure information sent by the third communication device; the first communication device Send DRX configuration failure information to the second communication device; or, the first communication device starts a timer after sending the resource configuration request information to the third communication device; when the timer expires and the first communication device does not receive the third communication device's transmission When the resource configuration information is configured, the first communication device sends DRX configuration failure information to the second communication device.
  • the DRX configuration failure information is also used to trigger the second communication device to send fourth information to the network device to which the second communication device belongs, and the fourth information is used to indicate that the DRX configuration corresponding to the first side link fails .
  • the fourth information may be the aforementioned DRX configuration failure information, that is, the receiving terminal device forwards the DRX configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs, or the fourth information may also include indication information generated by the receiving terminal device based on the DRX configuration failure information , To indicate that the DRX configuration corresponding to the link on the first side fails.
  • the aforementioned identification information may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel identification, resource pool identification, side link service identification, media access Control layer protocol data unit MAC PDU identification, transmission block TB identification.
  • the first communication device sending the first information to the second communication device and sending the second information to the third communication device include: the first communication device sending the first information to the third communication device Resource configuration request information, and sending DRX configuration failure information to the second communication device.
  • the first DRX configuration information is the current DRX configuration information of the first communication device; the above method further includes: the first communication device receives the first resource configuration information from the third communication device ; The first communication device determines that the first DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information.
  • the first communication device is a sending terminal device
  • the second communication device is a receiving terminal device
  • the third communication device is a network device to which the sending terminal device belongs; wherein, the first resource configuration
  • the information can be used to indicate the resources configured by the base station for the sending terminal device in mode1, and can also be used to indicate the resource pool corresponding to the sending terminal device in mode2.
  • the first communication device is a receiving terminal device
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the receiving terminal device belongs
  • the third communication device is a receiving terminal device.
  • the first resource configuration information is used to indicate the receiving resource corresponding to the sending terminal device in mode2.
  • the first communication device is a receiving terminal device
  • the second communication device is a network device of the receiving terminal device
  • the third communication device is a sending terminal device; wherein, the first resource configuration information It includes resource configuration information used to instruct the receiving terminal device to sense.
  • the first communication device may be an assisted user equipment
  • the second communication device may be a network device to which the assisted user equipment belongs
  • the third communication device may be an auxiliary user equipment; wherein, the first resource configuration information includes instructions for indicating Resource configuration information perceived by the first communication device.
  • the first communication device is a receiving terminal device
  • the second communication device is a sending terminal device
  • the third communication device is a network device to which the receiving terminal device belongs; wherein, the first resource configuration The information is used to receive the side link data sent by the terminal device on the second side link with other terminal devices (ie, the fourth communication device). It is also understandable that the first resource configuration information is used to receive the terminal device to other The terminal device sends side link data.
  • the first communication device is a receiving terminal device
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the receiving terminal device belongs
  • the third communication device is a sending terminal device; wherein, the first resource configuration The information is used to indicate one or more resource sets corresponding to the receiving terminal device.
  • the first communication device is an assisted user equipment
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the assisted user equipment belongs
  • the third communication device is an auxiliary user equipment.
  • the first communication device sending the second information to the third communication device includes: the first communication device sends mode switching request information to the third communication device, and the mode switching request information is used for Request the third communication device to switch the resource allocation mode of the first communication device from the first mode to the second mode and configure resources for the first communication device according to the second mode; or, the first communication device sends the resource configuration to the third communication device Failure information, where the resource configuration failure information includes at least one of the following: fifth information used to indicate a resource configuration failure, used to indicate a configuration failure type that does not match the resource configuration information and the DRX configuration information, the first DRX configuration information, and the first DRX configuration information. 1. Identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information, desired resource configuration information or resource adjustment amount.
  • the resource allocation mode of the first communication device includes mode1 and mode2.
  • the first mode is mode1, and the second mode is mode2; or, the first mode is mode2, and the second resource is mode1.
  • the base station allocates SL transmission resources to the transmitting terminal device through scheduling; in mode2, the terminal device autonomously selects transmission resources from a resource pool pre-configured or configured by the base station according to needs, without the base station for scheduling.
  • the first communication device sending the first information to the second communication device includes: the first communication device sends DRX configuration request information to the third communication device; wherein, the DRX configuration request information It includes at least one of the following: a request reason used to indicate a mismatch between the DRX configuration information and the resource configuration information, the first resource configuration information, the desired DRX configuration or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • sending the first information to the second communication device by the first communication device and sending the second information to the third communication device includes: the first communication device sends to the second communication device Resource configuration failure information, and sending DRX configuration request information to the third communication device.
  • this application provides a communication device, which is configured to execute the communication method as described in the first to tenth aspects and any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • the present application provides a communication device, including: a processor and a memory; the processor is coupled to the memory, and the processor is configured to read and execute instructions in the memory to implement aspects such as the first to tenth aspects and The communication method described in any possible implementation manner.
  • the present application provides a communication system, including: the communication device as described in the twelfth aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • this application provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program or instruction is stored.
  • the computer program or instruction executes as described in the first to tenth aspects and any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an architecture of a communication system in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another architecture of the communication system in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method in a scenario where a UE autonomously selects resources in an embodiment of the application;
  • FIG. 4 is a first schematic diagram of resources and DRX activation period in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a second schematic diagram of resources and DRX activation period in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a third schematic diagram of resources and DRX activation period in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the first flow of the first communication device-side communication method in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the second flow of the first communication device-side communication method in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the third process of the first communication device-side communication method in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a DRX activation period corresponding to a resource and a current service in an embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a communication device in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of another architecture of the communication system in an embodiment of this application.
  • 15 is a schematic diagram of the fourth process of the first communication device-side communication method in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of the first scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a second scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a third scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of a fourth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram of a fifth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the fifth flow of the first communication device-side communication method in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of a sixth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of a seventh scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of an eighth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of a ninth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of a tenth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of another structure of the communication device in an embodiment of the application.
  • the corresponding device may include one or more units such as functional units to perform the described one or more method steps (for example, one unit performs one or more steps) , Or multiple units, each of which performs one or more of multiple steps), even if such one or more units are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings.
  • the corresponding method may include one step to perform the functionality of one or more units (for example, one step performs one or more units). The functionality, or multiple steps, each of which performs the functionality of one or more of the multiple units), even if such one or more steps are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings.
  • the new radio (NR) system is the current mainstream wireless communication technology. It aims to support V2X with lower latency and higher reliability in response to the characteristics of the vehicle to everything (V2X) service and new service transmission requirements. Communication.
  • the receiving end user equipment (RX UE) will always monitor the SCI to check whether there is information from and sending end user equipment (TX UE).
  • TX UE sending end user equipment
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an architecture of a communication system in an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication system 10 may include: a network device 11 and a terminal device 12.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another architecture of the communication system in an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication system 10 may further include a plurality of terminal devices 12.
  • the type and number of network elements included in the communication system, and the connection relationship between the network elements are not limited to this.
  • the terminal device while the terminal device communicates with the network device, it can also communicate with other terminal devices.
  • the network device can perform resource configuration, scheduling, coordination, etc. on the sidelink of the communication between the terminal devices to assist the direct communication between the terminal devices.
  • the terminal device may also perform resource configuration, scheduling, coordination, etc., on the side link of communication between other terminal devices by itself, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned network device may be a device used on the access network side to support terminal access to a wireless communication system.
  • it may be a next generation NodeB (gNB) in a 5G access technology communication system.
  • TRP transmission reception point
  • RSU road site unit
  • the above terminal device may be a device that provides voice or data connectivity to users, for example, it may also be called user equipment (UE), mobile station (mobile station), subscriber unit (subscriber unit), station (STAtion) Or terminal equipment (terminal equipment, TE), etc.
  • Communication devices can be cellular phones, personal digital assistants (PDAs), wireless modems, handheld V2P devices (handheld vehicles to perdestrian), laptop computers, cordless phones ( cordless phone, wireless local loop (WLL) station or tablet (pad), relay node, AP, etc.
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • AP relay node
  • terminals in smart transportation, cars or RSUs household equipment in smart homes, power meter reading equipment in smart grids, voltage monitoring equipment, environmental monitoring equipment, video monitoring equipment in smart security networks, cash registers, etc.
  • the communication equipment can be statically fixed or mobile.
  • the above-mentioned communication devices can be divided into sending end devices and receiving end devices according to the data transmission direction.
  • the sending end device may include a sending end network device, a sending terminal device, a sending end user equipment, etc.
  • the receiving end device may include a receiving end network device, a receiving end device, a receiving end user equipment, and so on.
  • sending end equipment or sending end network equipment, sending terminal equipment, sending end user equipment, etc.
  • receiving end equipment or receiving end network equipment, receiving terminal equipment, receiving end user equipment, etc.
  • a communication device or network device, terminal device, user equipment, etc.
  • the sender device or sender network device, sender terminal device, sender user device, etc.
  • side link connection B the communication device (or network device, terminal device, user equipment, etc.) may be the receiving end device (or receiving end network device, receiving terminal device, receiving end user equipment, etc.).
  • a network device such as a base station, configures a resource pool for the SL communication of the UE, and a resource pool is a collection of some time-frequency resources.
  • the resources for the UE to communicate on the SL link are determined from a resource pool pre-configured or configured on the base station side.
  • there are two modes for the TX UE to obtain the transmission resources for communication on the SL link from the network device namely mode1 and mode2.
  • the foregoing pre-configured resources may be obtained from a network element of the core network, or may be preset in the UE.
  • the base station allocates SL transmission resources for the TX UE through scheduling.
  • the TX UE when the TX UE has SL to transmit data, it reports the SL buffer status report (BSR) MAC CE to the base station through the Uu port to inform the base station of the current TX UE's data to be transmitted on the PC5 port. quantity.
  • BSR SL buffer status report
  • the base station can dynamically allocate transmission resources for the TX UE.
  • the UE autonomously selects transmission resources from the resource pool pre-configured or configured by the base station as needed, without the base station for scheduling.
  • the SL resource determined by the UE is configured by the base station (for example, configured through RRC signaling or system information block (system information block, SIB) configuration), or pre-configured.
  • the pre-configuration mentioned here may be obtained from the network element of the core network, or may be preset in the UE.
  • the TX UE performs a resource selection, which will be a service, such as a communication destination (indicated by destination ID, such as destination L1 ID or destination L2 ID), and a side link connection (Such as radio resource control (RRC) connection), one SL link, one source and destination pair (such as ⁇ source L2/L1 ID, destination L2/L1 ID ⁇ ), one side link service, one logic Channel, a resource pool, a transport block (transform block, TB), one or more medium access control layer packet data unit (medium access control packet data unit, MAC PDU), etc.
  • a service such as a communication destination (indicated by destination ID, such as destination L1 ID or destination L2 ID), and a side link connection (Such as radio resource control (RRC) connection), one SL link, one source and destination pair (such as ⁇ source L2/L1 ID, destination L2/L1 ID ⁇ ), one side link service, one logic Channel, a resource pool, a transport block (transform block, TB), one or
  • At least one resource (usually can include one time One to three resources of transmission opportunities and their corresponding periodic resources), at least one resource is used for new transmission or retransmission of the service, and this at least one resource may also be referred to as reserved resources (reserved resources).
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method in a scenario where a UE autonomously selects resources in an embodiment of the application.
  • the method may include:
  • TX UE performs sensing (sensing);
  • the TX UE continuously monitors the SCI sent by other UEs, and performs measurement according to the instructions of the SCI to obtain the measurement result.
  • the TX UE monitors the SCI of other UEs, it demodulates the SCI, and the demodulated SCI can at least reflect the usage of resources on the sidelink.
  • the above-mentioned “measurement” may include the measurement of sidelink RSRP based on the sidelink demodulation reference signal (DMRS), for example, measuring the reference signal receiving power (RSRP) of PSCCH ( That is, PSCCH-RSRP) or PSSCH-RSRP; or, the sidelink received signal strength indicator (S-RSSI) can also be measured.
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • S-RSSI sidelink received signal strength indicator
  • the PSCCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSCCH
  • the PSSCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSSCH.
  • the UE may also measure other parameters of the resource indicated by the SCI, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the TX UE excludes the resources indicated by the SCI according to the obtained measurement results, and determines a candidate resource set.
  • the TX UE excludes the resources whose measurement results meet a certain condition from the resources indicated by the SCI, so that the candidate resource set of the TX UE can be obtained. Then, the TX UE can select resources from the candidate resource set for transmission when transmitting services. . For example, through S301, the TX UE measures the received power of the reference signal on the SCI to obtain PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP. Then, the TX UE can exclude the resources for which the PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP meets the preset conditions, or TX The UE can exclude the resources occupied by other UEs according to the instructions of the SCI. Furthermore, the TX UE can also exclude the resources occupied by other UEs and the RSRP is higher than the preset threshold.
  • the above-mentioned preset condition may be that the RSRP value is within the preset range, for example, the RSRP value is in the top 20% of all measured RSRP values in descending order or descending order, or the RSRP value is higher than 70% of all RSRP values.
  • the above-mentioned preset conditions can also be other conditions. For example, it can be set according to the transmission priority of the TX UE and the transmission priority indicated in the SCI of other UEs. The embodiment of this application will not make specific details. limited.
  • the TX UE can also demodulate the SCI through S301 to obtain the subcarrier spacing configuration of the resource.
  • the RX UE can also filter the resources according to the subcarrier spacing configuration of the resource, so that the selected subcarrier spacing can be selected.
  • the resources that meet the transmission requirements are used for subsequent side link transmission.
  • the TX UE can exclude resources based on other conditions, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the resources selected by the TX UE can be understood as reserved resources.
  • the TX UE After the service arrives, the TX UE first checks the resource selection or resource reselection to determine whether to trigger the resource selection or reselection; if the resource selection or reselection is triggered, the TX UE determines the resource reservation period and selects the hybrid automatic Retransmission request (hybrid automatic repeat request, HARQ) retransmission times, etc.; then, TX UE from the candidate resource set, according to the selected frequency domain resources and the remaining packet delay of the available side link data of the logical channel allowed on the carrier
  • the budget (packet delay budget, PDB) selects the time-frequency resources used for a transmission opportunity, and the TX UE can also use the selected time-domain resources to determine a good resource reservation period and then select the corresponding periodic resource set . If the TX UE determines that there is no retransmission, the time domain resource selected by the TX UE and its corresponding periodic resource set can be regarded as the "selected SL grant"
  • the TX UE determines that there is one or more retransmissions according to the number of HARQ retransmissions, and there are available resources in the resources indicated by the physical layer for multiple transmission opportunities, then according to the number of selected frequency domain resources , The selected HARQ retransmission times and the remaining PDB of the available SL data of the logical channel allowed on the carrier, select the time-frequency resource for one or more transmission opportunities from the available resources. Then use the time-frequency resource and resource reservation period to select the corresponding periodic resource set, and treat the selected resource and its corresponding periodic resource set as the "selected SL grant" (resource)
  • the services in S303 above may include: communication targets, side link connections (such as source and target pairs, sidelink links, etc.), logical channels, resource pools, side link services, A combination of one or more of MAC PDU, TB, etc., is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the service is MAC PDU, there can be one or more MAC PDUs.
  • the aforementioned communication destination can be identified by a destination ID (communication destination ID), which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • TX UE Before performing service transmission, TX UE will also re-evaluate reserved resources to see whether the reserved resources selected by S303 can be used for side link transmission, so as to ensure that the finally selected resources can be used for side link transmission. .
  • the reserved resources may not be used for side link transmission due to some reasons. Therefore, the TX UE also needs to evaluate the first resource to determine whether to trigger resource reselection.
  • the above reasons may include: upper-layer configuration or reconfiguration of the resource pool; or, no configured sidelink gran; or, in the past second, the MAC entity has neither new transmission nor retransmission on any resource indicated by the configured sidelink grant; or, Sl-ReselectAfter is configured, and the continuous unused transmission opportunity indicated by the configured sidelink grant reaches sl-ReselectAfter; or, the transmission resource indicated by the configured sidelink grant cannot satisfy the data on a certain logical channel determined according to the priority of the corresponding logical channel And the MAC entity chooses not to transmit the corresponding single MAC PDU; or, the priority of the logical channel indicated by the SCI received by the UE is higher than the priority of the logical channel of the data to be transmitted, and a certain SCI scheduled Each sl transmission is expected to
  • the TX UE autonomously selects resources for side link transmission.
  • the DRX function can be configured for the RX UE.
  • a DRX cycle (DRX cycle) can be divided into an active period (onduration) and a sleep period (opportunity for DRX).
  • the "on duration" period is the UE The time to monitor the downlink PSCCH and/or PSSCH subframes.
  • the UE is in the awake state and can receive transmissions from the TX UE; the period of "opportunity for DRX" is the DRX sleep time, which means that the UE Save power, enter the sleep state, turn off its own receiver without monitoring the time of PSCCH and/or PSSCH subframes.
  • the RX UE does not monitor the SCI during the active period, it will enter the sleep period, resulting in the RX UE being unable to receive side link transmission on the resource selected by the TX UE.
  • the activation period in the DRX configuration can be periodic.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be applied to the first communication device in the foregoing communication system, such as a TX UE.
  • the "resource and DRX activation period overlap in the time domain" mentioned in the embodiments of the present application can be understood as: the resource is wholly or partly located in the time domain of the DRX activation period in the time domain.
  • “there is no intersection between the resource and the DRX activation period in the time domain” can be understood as: the resource is located outside the time range of the DRX activation period in the time domain, and the resource and the DRX activation period are separated in the time domain.
  • FIG. 4 is the first schematic diagram of the resource and the DRX activation period in the embodiment of this application. As shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 4 in the time domain, the resource is located within the time range of the DRX activation period, that is, the resource is included in the DRX activation period.
  • DRX activation period; or, FIG. 5 is a second schematic diagram of the resource and DRX activation period in the embodiment of this application. As shown in FIG. 5, in the time domain, a part of the resource, such as at least one symbol is located in the DRX activation period
  • Figure 6 is a third schematic diagram of the resource and the DRX activation period in the embodiment of this application. As shown in Figure 6, in the time domain, no symbol of the resource is within the DRX activation period.
  • the relationship between the resource and the DRX activation period in the time domain can be referred to the description of FIG. 4 to FIG. 6, which will not be repeated below.
  • the DRX configuration may be configured per (per) service, and the DRX configuration information may include the DRX activation period.
  • the "service” can be as described above, and can include one of communication targets, side link connections, source and target pairs, sidelink links, logical channels, resource pools, side link services, MAC PDU, TB, etc., or For multiple combinations, the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit this.
  • DRX configuration information can be configured for each destination ID. It is understandable that the DRX configuration can be configured by the base station for the UE, it can also be determined by the TX UE or RX UE itself, it can also be negotiated and configured between the receiving and transmitting UEs, or it can be preset in the UE. This application The embodiments are not specifically limited.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the first flow of the first communication device-side communication method in an embodiment of the application. Refer to FIG. 7 for the method. include:
  • the first communication device performs sensing (sensing);
  • the first communication device continuously monitors the SCI sent by other UEs, and performs measurement according to the instructions of the SCI to obtain the measurement result.
  • the first communication device monitors the SCI of other UEs, it demodulates the SCI, and the demodulated SCI can at least reflect the usage of resources on the sidelink.
  • the above-mentioned “measurement” may include sidelink DMRS-based L1sidelink RSRP measurement, for example, measuring PSCCH RSRP (ie PSCCH-RSRP) or PSSCH-RSRP; alternatively, S-RSSI can also be measured.
  • PSCCH-RSRP is obtained by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSCCH
  • PSSCH-RSRP is obtained by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSSCH.
  • the first communication device may also measure other parameters of the SCI, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first communication device excludes the resource indicated by the SCI according to the obtained measurement result.
  • the first communication device excludes the resources whose measurement results meet a certain condition from the resources indicated by the SCI, and thus can obtain the candidate resource set of the first communication device. Then, the first communication device can be in the candidate resource set when transmitting services. Resources are selected in a centralized manner for transmission. For example, through S701, the first communication device measures the received power of the reference signal on the SCI to obtain PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP, and then the first communication device may exclude resources whose PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP meets the preset conditions Or, the first communication device may exclude resources occupied by other UEs according to the instruction of the SCI. Furthermore, the first communication device may also exclude resources occupied by other UEs and resources whose RSRP is higher than a preset threshold.
  • the above-mentioned preset condition may be that the RSRP value is within the preset range, for example, the RSRP value is in the top 20% of all measured RSRP values in descending order or descending order, or the RSRP value is higher than 70% of all RSRP values.
  • the above-mentioned preset conditions can also be other conditions. For example, it can be set according to the transmission priority of the first communication device and the transmission priority indicated in the SCI of other UEs. There is no specific limitation.
  • the first communication device may also demodulate the SCI through S701 to obtain the subcarrier interval configuration of the resource.
  • the first communication device may also filter the resource according to the subcarrier interval configuration of the resource, so that the selected The sub-carrier spacing meets the transmission requirements of resources for subsequent side link transmission.
  • the first communication device may exclude resources based on other conditions, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the first communication device determines the first candidate resource and the first service used for side link transmission
  • the first communication device determines the first candidate resource through S702, and obtains the first service that it can currently determine.
  • the first service may include the current service and/or the historical service.
  • the "first service" may be as described above. Assuming that the first service is the communication destination identified by the destination ID as an example, the first communication device may determine at least one destination ID as a set of candidate destination IDs, and the set of candidate destination IDs may include The current optional destination ID of the first communication device, and/or the historical optional destination ID.
  • the first communication device determines the first resource from the first candidate resources.
  • the first communication device can select, from the first candidate resources, a resource that has an intersection with the first active period as the second candidate resource, and then determine from the second selected resource The first resource.
  • the first resource can be understood as a reserved resource.
  • the first communication device may determine the first resource from the second candidate resources by using the method described in S303.
  • the above-mentioned first activation period may include at least one DRX activation period corresponding to the first service.
  • the first activation period may correspond to a destination ID.
  • the first activation period can be the union of multiple DRX activation periods in the DRX configuration corresponding to the multiple destination IDs; then, the first communication device can select from the first candidate resource The resource that intersects the union is used as the second candidate resource. Then, the first communication device may also select the first resource from the second candidate resources.
  • the first communication device may select part or all of the first candidate resources to be located in The combination of multiple DRX activation periods mentioned above obtains resources as the second candidate resource, and then from the second candidate resource, according to the number of frequency domain resources selected and the available side link data of the logical channel allowed on the carrier
  • the remaining PDB selects the time-frequency resource used for one transmission opportunity, and further can use the selected time-domain resource to determine a good resource reservation period and then select the corresponding periodic resource.
  • the first activation period can be multiple DRX activation periods in the DRX configuration corresponding to the destination ID, then the first communication device can select the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain The resource that meets the first condition in the intersection of the two is used as the second candidate resource.
  • the above-mentioned first condition may include: the intersection of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain is the largest, and the intersection of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain is within a preset range (can Is an empirical value), the intersection of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain is greater than a preset threshold, etc.
  • the first communication device determines the resource with the largest number of symbols in the intersection of the first candidate resource and subframe 0 as the second candidate resource, or the first candidate resource.
  • the communication device determines the resource whose number of symbols in the intersection with subframe 0 in the first candidate resource is greater than 80% (that is, 11 symbols) as the second candidate resource, and alternatively, the first communication device places the first candidate resource in the first candidate resource.
  • the resources in symbol 1 to symbol 12 of subframe 0 are determined to be the second candidate resources.
  • the DRX activation period corresponding to a destination ID is subframe 0, subframe 3, and subframe 6.
  • the first communication device stores the first candidate resource in subframe 0, subframe 3, and subframe 6, respectively.
  • the multiple resources with the largest intersection are determined as the second candidate resources, that is, the resource a with the largest intersection with subframe 0 among the first candidate resources, the resource b with the largest intersection with subframe 3, and the resource c with the largest intersection with subframe 6 are selected.
  • the resources a, b, and c are determined as the second candidate resources; or, the first communication device determines that the number of symbols in the first candidate resource that respectively intersect with subframe 0, subframe 3, and subframe 6 is greater than 80%.
  • Resource is determined as the second candidate resource, or, the first communication device determines multiple resources in the first candidate resource located in symbols 1 to 12 of subframe 0, subframe 3, and subframe 6 as the second candidate resource.
  • candidate resources include butte resources.
  • the first condition may also be other conditions, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first communication device has completed resource selection.
  • the first communication device Before performing service transmission, the first communication device will also re-evaluate the first resource to see whether the first resource selected in S703 can be used for side link transmission. For example, due to the arrival of new services, the first resource being occupied by other UEs, etc., the previously selected first resource may not be used for side link transmission. Therefore, the first communication device needs to re-check the selected first resource. Resources are evaluated.
  • the first communication device also needs to evaluate the first resource to determine whether to trigger resource reconfiguration. select.
  • the above reasons may include: upper-layer configuration or reconfiguration of the resource pool; or, no configured sidelink gran; or, in the past second, the MAC entity has neither new transmission nor retransmission on any resource indicated by the configured sidelink grant; or, Sl-ReselectAfter is configured, and the continuous unused transmission opportunity indicated by the configured sidelink grant reaches sl-ReselectAfter; or, the transmission resource indicated by the configured sidelink grant cannot satisfy the data on a certain logical channel determined according to the priority of the corresponding logical channel And the MAC entity chooses not to transmit the corresponding single MAC PDU; or, the priority of the logical channel indicated by the SCI received by the UE is higher than the priority of the logical channel of the data to be transmitted, and a certain SCI scheduled Each sl
  • the first resource selected by the first communication device performing S703 to S704 may also be used as a candidate resource, so that the first communication device selects a reserved resource from the candidate resources, and then performs S705 to S710.
  • the first communication device selects resources that have an intersection with the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service as the reserved resources, and uses the reserved resources to perform the side link Transmission, which can ensure that the first communication device can receive the transmission from the second communication device (such as TX UE) during the activation period, save the power consumption of the RX UE, and ensure the communication between the first communication device and the second communication device Side link transmission.
  • the second communication device such as TX UE
  • the first communication device uses the first resource to start the side chain after performing S707. Before channel transmission, you can also select the first service, that is, the destination ID. At this time, the first communication device can select from the above multiple destination IDs that the corresponding DRX activation period and the first resource overlap in the time domain.
  • the destination ID (used to identify the second service), that is, the DRX activation period corresponding to the last selected destination ID and the reserved resources overlap in the time domain.
  • the first communication device may also use the foregoing method to select the destination ID before performing S706, so that the selected destination ID has an intersection with the reserved resource in the time domain.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device may determine that at least one DRX configuration is The union of the DRX activation period in the time domain, that is, the first activation period, and indicates to the physical layer.
  • the at least one DRX configuration may be a part or all of the DRX configuration that can be determined by the first communication device, for example, at least one DRX configuration.
  • the configuration may include the DRX configuration of the first service.
  • the PSCCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSCCH
  • the PSSCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSSCH.
  • the first communication device may also measure other parameters of the resource indicated by the SCI, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first communication device monitors the SCI during the first activation period. Then, the SCI is in the first activation period. Then, the first communication device measures the SCI during the first activation period. Take measurements.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device first sends the physical The layer indicates the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service and/or the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service, and then the physical layer excludes the resource from the second resource , Determining the resource that has an intersection with the foregoing union as the first candidate resource.
  • the first candidate resource needs to meet at least one of the following conditions: there is an intersection in the time domain with the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service; In the time domain, there is an intersection with the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service.
  • the physical layer may further execute the method described in S702 above from the first candidate resource to further exclude the resource to determine the candidate resource, and then determine the first resource.
  • the embodiment of this application does not Make specific restrictions.
  • the second resource may be the resource corresponding to the resource determined by the physical layer through sensing in the selection window, or may be the resource left after the physical layer performs S702 to exclude the resource from the resource selection determined through sensing.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the second flow of the communication method on the side of the first communication device in an embodiment of the present application. Refer to FIG. 8 for this method. include:
  • the first communication device determines the second activation period
  • the first communication device monitors the SCI sent by other UEs during the second activation period
  • the SCI is used to indicate resources used by other UEs for side link transmission.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device after determining the second activation period, indicates the second activation period to the physical layer of the first communication device, and the physical layer monitors the SCI sent by other UEs during the second activation period, and then The physical layer measures during the second activation period.
  • the first communication device determines the union of the DRX activation period in the time domain in at least one DRX configuration, that is, the second activation period.
  • the at least one DRX configuration may be the first communication device Part or all of the DRX configuration that can be determined, for example, at least one DRX configuration may include the DRX configuration of the first service.
  • the first communication device may perform measurement in the second activation period according to the SCI, that is, perform measurement on the SCI. For example, measuring PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP; or measuring S-RSSI. Among them, PSCCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with PSCCH, and PSSCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with PSSCH. Of course, the first communication device may also measure other parameters of the SCI, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first communication device monitors the SCI during the second activation period, and the SCI is in the second activation period. Then, the first communication device measures the SCI during the second activation period. Take measurements.
  • the first communication device completes sensing in the second activation period.
  • the first communication device excludes the resource indicated by the SCI according to the obtained measurement result, and determines the first candidate resource.
  • the first communication device excludes the resources whose measurement results meet a certain condition from the resources indicated by the SCI, and thus can obtain the candidate resource set of the first communication device. Then, the first communication device can be in the candidate resource set when transmitting services. Resources are selected in a centralized manner for transmission. For example, through S801, the first communication device measures the received power of the reference signal on the SCI to determine PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP, and then the first communication device may exclude resources whose PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP meets preset conditions Or, the first communication device may exclude resources occupied by other UEs according to the instructions of the SCI. Furthermore, the first communication device may also exclude resources occupied by other UEs and resources whose RSRP is higher than a preset threshold.
  • the above-mentioned preset condition may be that the RSRP value is within the preset range, for example, the RSRP value is in the top 20% of all measured RSRP values in descending order or descending order, or the RSRP value is higher than All RSRP values are less than 70%.
  • the above-mentioned preset conditions can also be other conditions, which can be set according to the transmission priority of the first communication device and the transmission priority indicated in the SCI of other UEs. There is no specific limitation.
  • the first communication device may also demodulate the SCI through S801 to determine the subcarrier spacing configuration of the resource.
  • the first communication device may also filter the resources according to the subcarrier spacing configuration of the resource, so that the selected The sub-carrier spacing meets the transmission requirements of resources for subsequent side link transmission.
  • the first communication device may exclude resources based on other conditions, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the first communication device selects the first resource used for side link transmission from the first candidate resources.
  • the first communication device may select a reserved resource for the first service from the first candidate resources, which is the first resource.
  • the above-mentioned first service may include one of: communication target, side link connection, source and target pair, sidelink link, logical channel, resource pool, side link service, MAC PDU, TB, etc. Or a combination of multiples, the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit this.
  • the first communication device Before performing service transmission, the first communication device will also re-evaluate the first resource to see whether the first resource selected in S803 can be used for side link transmission. For example, due to the arrival of new services, the first resource being occupied by other UEs, etc., the previously selected first resource may not be used for side link transmission. Therefore, the first communication device needs to re-check the selected first resource. Resources are evaluated.
  • the first communication device also needs to evaluate the first resource to determine whether to trigger resource reconfiguration. select.
  • the above reasons may include: upper-layer configuration or reconfiguration of the resource pool; or, no configured sidelink gran; or, in the past second, the MAC entity has neither new transmission nor retransmission on any resource indicated by the configured sidelink grant; or, Sl-ReselectAfter is configured, and the continuous unused transmission opportunity indicated by the configured sidelink grant reaches sl-ReselectAfter; or, the transmission resource indicated by the configured sidelink grant cannot satisfy the data on a certain logical channel determined according to the priority of the corresponding logical channel And the MAC entity chooses not to transmit the corresponding single MAC PDU; or, the priority of the logical channel indicated by the SCI received by the UE is higher than the priority of the logical channel of the data to be transmitted, and a certain SCI scheduled Each sl
  • the first communication device selects resources that have an intersection (ie, the second activation period) of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service as the reserved resources, and uses the resources.
  • Reserving resources for side link transmission can ensure that the first communication device can receive the transmission from the second communication device (such as TX UE) during the active period, saving the power consumption of the RX UE, and ensuring that the first communication device and the Side link transmission between second communication devices.
  • the first communication device may also determine the first candidate resource and the first candidate resource for side link transmission.
  • the first communication device determines the first resource from the first candidate resources.
  • the first communication device may also obtain the first service that it can currently determine. Since the DRX configuration is configured for the first service, the first communication device can select, from the first candidate resources, the resources that overlap with the second active period as the second candidate resources, and then determine from the second selected resources The first resource. At this time, the first resource can be understood as a reserved resource.
  • the first service may include the current service and/or historical service. The “first service” is as described above. Assuming that the first service is the communication destination identified by the destination ID as an example, the first communication device can determine at least one destination ID As a set of candidate destination IDs, the candidate destination ID set may include the current optional destination ID of the first communication device and/or the historical optional destination ID.
  • the foregoing second activation period may be an activation period corresponding to one destination ID or an activation period corresponding to multiple destination IDs.
  • the second activation period can be the union of multiple DRX activation periods in the DRX configuration corresponding to the multiple destination IDs; then, the first communication device can select from the first candidate resource the The resources with intersections in the union are used as the second candidate resources. Then, the first communication device may also select the first resource from the second candidate resources.
  • the resource composed of multiple DRX activation periods is collected as the second candidate resource, and then from the second candidate resource, the remaining PDB of the available side link data according to the number of frequency domain resources selected and the logical channel allowed on the carrier
  • the time-frequency resource used for a transmission opportunity is selected, and the selected time-domain resource can be further used to determine a good resource reservation period and then select the corresponding periodic resource.
  • the second activation period can be multiple DRX activation periods in the DRX configuration corresponding to the destination ID, then the first communication device can select the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain The resource that meets the first condition in the intersection of the two is used as the second candidate resource.
  • the above-mentioned first condition may include: the intersection of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain is the largest, the intersection of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain is within a preset range, The intersection of the DRX activation periods corresponding to the first service in the time domain is greater than one or more of the preset thresholds and the like.
  • the first communication device determines the resource with the largest number of symbols in the intersection of the first candidate resource and subframe 0 as the second candidate resource, or the first candidate resource
  • the communication device determines the resource whose number of symbols in the intersection with subframe 0 in the first candidate resource is greater than 80% (ie 11 symbols) as the second candidate resource.
  • the first communication device determines the first candidate resource in the subframe.
  • the resources in the symbol 1 to the symbol 12 of the frame 0 are determined as the second candidate resources.
  • the DRX activation period corresponding to a destination ID is subframe 0, subframe 3, and subframe 6.
  • the first communication device compares the first candidate resource with subframe 0, subframe 3, and subframe 6.
  • the plurality of resources whose intersection is the largest is determined as the second candidate resource, or the first communication device determines that the number of symbols in the first candidate resource that intersect with subframe 0, subframe 3, and subframe 6 is greater than 80% (ie 11 symbols) are determined as the second candidate resource.
  • the first communication device determines the number of the first candidate resources located in symbols 1 to 12 in subframe 0, subframe 3, and subframe 6, respectively.
  • One resource is determined as the second candidate resource.
  • the first condition may also be other conditions, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first resource selected by the first communication device in S804 may also be used as a candidate resource for the first communication device to select a reserved resource from the candidate resources, and then perform S805 to S810.
  • the first communication device uses the first resource to start the side link in S807. Before transmission, you can also select the first service, that is, the destination ID. At this time, the first communication device can select from the above multiple destination IDs the destination where the corresponding DRX activation period and the first resource overlap in the time domain. ID (used to identify the second service), that is, the DRX activation period corresponding to the last selected destination ID and the reserved resources overlap in the time domain.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device first The layer indicates the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service and/or the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service, and then the physical layer performs resources from the second resource Exclude, determine the resource that has an intersection with the above union as the third candidate resource, that is, the third candidate resource needs to meet at least one of the following conditions: there is an intersection in the time domain with the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service ; In the time domain, there is an intersection with the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service.
  • the third candidate resource can be used as the above-mentioned first candidate resource.
  • the physical layer indicates the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service and/or the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non
  • the second resource may be the resource corresponding to the resource determined by the physical layer through sensing in the selection window, or may be the resource left after the physical layer performs S702 to exclude the resource from the resource selection determined through sensing.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the third flow of the first communication device-side communication method in an embodiment of the present application. Refer to FIG. 9 for this method. include:
  • the first communication device performs sensing (sensing);
  • the first communication device continuously monitors the SCI sent by other UEs, and according to the instructions of the SCI, measures the resources indicated by the SCI to determine the measurement result.
  • the first communication device monitors the SCI of other UEs, it demodulates the SCI, and the demodulated SCI can at least reflect the usage of resources on the sidelink.
  • the above-mentioned “measurement” may include sidelink RSRP measurement based on sidelink DMRS, for example, measuring PSCCH RSRP (ie PSCCH-RSRP) or PSSCH-RSRP; alternatively, S-RSSI may also be measured.
  • PSCCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSCCH
  • PSSCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSSCH.
  • the first communication device may also measure other parameters of the resource indicated by the SCI, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first communication device determines the fourth resource
  • the fourth resource may be a resource in the selection window, or may be a resource remaining after resource elimination is performed on the resource in the selection window.
  • S903 The first communication device determines a third candidate resource from the fourth resource.
  • the third candidate resource needs to meet at least one of the following conditions: in the time domain there is an intersection with the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service; in the time domain, it has an intersection with the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service The union of the corresponding DRX activation periods has an intersection;
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device first indicates to the physical layer the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service and/or the current service in the first service and the corresponding non-periodic service in the historical service The union of the DRX activation period, that is, the first activation period.
  • the physical layer excludes resources from the fourth resource, and determines the resource that overlaps the above-mentioned union as the third candidate resource, that is, the third candidate
  • the resource needs to meet at least one of the following conditions: in the time domain there is an intersection with the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service; in the time domain, the DRX activation corresponding to the current service in the first service and the non-periodic service in the historical service is activated The union of periods has an intersection. Then, the third candidate resource can be used to determine the fifth resource.
  • the physical layer can further exclude resources from the third candidate resources.
  • the first communication device excludes resources whose measurement results meet a certain condition from the third candidate resources, and determines the remaining resources as The candidate resource of the first communication device, and the first communication device may further determine the fifth resource from the candidate resources for transmission when transmitting the first service.
  • the first communication device measures the received power of the reference signal on the SCI to determine PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP, and then the first communication device may exclude resources whose PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP meets the preset conditions
  • the first communication device may exclude resources occupied by other UEs according to the instruction of the SCI.
  • the first communication device may also exclude resources occupied by other UEs and resources whose RSRP is higher than a preset threshold.
  • the above-mentioned preset condition may be that the RSRP value is within the preset range, for example, the RSRP value is in the top 20% of all measured RSRP values in descending order or descending order, or the RSRP value is higher than 70% of all RSRP values.
  • the above-mentioned preset conditions can also be other conditions, which can be set according to the transmission priority of the first communication device and the transmission priority indicated in the SCI of other UEs, which is not done in this embodiment of the application. Specific restrictions.
  • the first communication device may also demodulate the SCI through S901 to determine the subcarrier interval configuration of the resource.
  • the first communication device may also filter the resource according to the subcarrier interval configuration of the resource, so that the selected The sub-carrier spacing meets the transmission requirements of resources for subsequent side link transmission.
  • the first communication device may exclude resources based on other conditions, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • the first communication device selects a fifth resource used for side link transmission from the third candidate resources.
  • the first communication device may select the reserved resource for the first service from the third candidate resource set, which is the fifth resource.
  • the above-mentioned first service may include one of: communication target, side link connection, source and target pair, sidelink link, LCH, resource pool, side link service, MAC PDU, TB, etc., or For multiple combinations, the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit this.
  • the first communication device Before performing service transmission, the first communication device will also re-evaluate the fifth resource to see whether the fifth resource selected by S903 can be used for side link transmission, so as to ensure that the finally selected resource can be used for side link Transmission.
  • the first communication device also needs to evaluate the first resource. To determine whether to trigger resource reselection.
  • the above reasons may include: upper-layer configuration or reconfiguration of the resource pool; or, no configured sidelink gran; or, in the past second, the MAC entity has neither new transmission nor retransmission on any resource indicated by the configured sidelink grant; or, Sl-ReselectAfter is configured, and the continuous unused transmission opportunity indicated by the configured sidelink grant reaches sl-ReselectAfter; or, the transmission resource indicated by the configured sidelink grant cannot satisfy the data on a certain logical channel determined according to the priority of the corresponding logical channel And the MAC entity chooses not to transmit the corresponding single MAC PDU; or, the priority of the logical channel indicated by the SCI received by the UE is higher than the priority of the logical channel of the data to be transmitted, and
  • the first communication device selects resources that have an intersection with the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service as the reserved resources, and uses the reserved resources to perform the side link Transmission, which can ensure that the first communication device can receive the transmission from the second communication device (such as TX UE) during the activation period, save the power consumption of the RX UE, and ensure the communication between the first communication device and the second communication device Side link transmission.
  • the second communication device such as TX UE
  • the first communication device when performing S901, the first communication device first determines the time domain of the DRX activation period in at least one DRX configuration.
  • the union is the first activation period.
  • the at least one DRX configuration may be part or all of the DRX configuration that can be determined by the first communication device.
  • the at least one DRX configuration may include the DRX configuration of the first service.
  • the first communication device performs sensing during the first activation period, demodulates the SCI of other UEs, and measures the SCI. For example, measuring PSCCH-RSRP or PSSCH-RSRP; or measuring S-RSSI.
  • the PSCCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSCCH
  • the PSSCH-RSRP is determined by measuring the DMRS associated with the PSSCH.
  • the first communication device may also measure other parameters of the resource indicated by the SCI, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the MAC layer of the first communication device determines the first activation period, it indicates the first activation period to the physical layer of the first communication device, and the physical layer monitors the SCI sent by other UEs during the first activation period. , And then the physical layer performs measurement in the first active period.
  • the first communication device may also determine the third candidate resource and the first candidate resource for side link transmission.
  • the first communication device determines the fifth resource from the third candidate resource.
  • the first communication device After the first communication device determines the third candidate resource through S903, it may also obtain the first service that it can currently determine. Since the DRX configuration is configured for the first service, the first communication device may select, from the third candidate resources, a resource that has an intersection with the first activation period as the fifth resource. At this time, the fifth resource may be a reserved resource.
  • the first service may include the current service and/or historical service.
  • the “first service” is as described above. Assuming that the first service is the communication destination identified by the destination ID as an example, the first communication device can determine at least one destination ID As a set of candidate destination IDs, the candidate destination ID set may include the current optional destination ID of the first communication device and/or the historical optional destination ID.
  • the above-mentioned first activation period may be an activation period corresponding to one destination ID or a union of activation periods corresponding to multiple destination IDs.
  • the first activation period can be the union of multiple DRX activation periods in the DRX configuration corresponding to the multiple destination IDs; then, the first communication device can select from the third candidate resource to match the The resources whose unions have intersections are used as the fourth candidate resources. Then, the first communication device may also select the fifth resource from the fourth candidate resources. For example, the first communication device may select part or all of the third candidate resources to be located in the foregoing, etc.
  • the resource composed of multiple DRX activation periods is collected as the fourth candidate resource, and then from the fourth candidate resource, the remaining PDB of the available side link data according to the number of selected frequency domain resources and the logical channel allowed on the carrier
  • the time-frequency resource used for a transmission opportunity is selected, and the selected time-domain resource can be further used to determine a good resource reservation period and then select the corresponding periodic resource.
  • the first activation period can be multiple DRX activation periods in the DRX configuration corresponding to the destination ID, then the first communication device can select the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain
  • the resource that meets the first condition in the intersection of the two is regarded as the fourth candidate resource.
  • the above-mentioned first condition may include one or more of the following: the intersection of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain is the largest, and the intersection of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain is at The intersection of the DRX activation periods corresponding to the first service in the time domain within the preset range is greater than the preset threshold, etc.
  • the fifth resource selected by the first communication device in S904 may also be used as a candidate resource for the first communication device to select a reserved resource from the candidate resources, and then perform S905 to S910.
  • the first communication device uses the fifth resource to start side link transmission in S907 Previously, the destination ID can also be selected. At this time, the first communication device can select from the above multiple destination IDs the corresponding DRX activation period and the fifth resource in the time domain where there is an intersection of the destination ID (used to identify the second Service), that is, the DRX activation period corresponding to the last selected destination ID and the reserved resources overlap in the time domain.
  • the first communication device may continuously evaluate the third resource (that is, the reserved resource selected by the first communication device), and if the first communication device determines that the third resource There is no intersection between the resource and the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service (third service or fourth service) of the first communication device, that is, the third resource is outside the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service in the time domain, then , The first communication device triggers resource reselection to reselect resources that overlap with the DRX activation period of the current service.
  • the third resource that is, the reserved resource selected by the first communication device
  • the current service is the service when the first communication device evaluates the third resource, and may be the same as or different from the first service.
  • the third service may include one or a combination of: communication target, side link connection, source and target pair, sidelink link, logical channel, resource pool, side link service, MAC PDU, TB, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
  • the fourth service may include: may include: communication target, side link connection, source and target pair, sidelink link, logical channel, resource pool, side link service, MAC PDU, TB, and a combination of one or more of them The embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
  • the third resource cannot be used for side link transmission.
  • the third resource does not meet the delay requirement of the first service.
  • the first communication device may trigger resource reselection. Further, the first communication device may also consider the relationship between the third resource and the DRX activation period of the current service to determine whether to trigger resource reselection.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the DRX activation period corresponding to the resource and the current service in the embodiment of this application.
  • the current service arrives at time t1, and the third resource starts between t2 and t1.
  • the time difference meets the delay requirements of the current service.
  • the third resource is outside the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service, that is, there is no intersection between the third resource and the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service.
  • the first communication device triggers Resource reselection.
  • the third resource and the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service of the first communication device may include: the third resource and the union of multiple DRX activation periods corresponding to the current service does not exist Intersection; or, there is no intersection between the third resource and at least one of the multiple DRX activation periods corresponding to the current service; or, the third resource meets the preset number of DRX activation periods among the multiple DRX activation periods corresponding to the current service There is no intersection.
  • the first A communication device determines that there is no intersection between the third resource and the multiple DRX activation periods corresponding to the current service that meet the preset number of DRX activation periods.
  • the first communication device may also configure the cycle for the first resource. Then, the first communication device may configure the DRX cycle (ie DRX cycle) that meets the second condition in the DRX configuration corresponding to the first service The period corresponding to the first resource.
  • the DRX cycle ie DRX cycle
  • the second condition may include: the minimum value of the DRX cycle in the DRX configuration corresponding to the first service, the DRX cycle in the DRX configuration corresponding to the first service is less than a preset threshold, and the DRX cycle in the DRX configuration corresponding to the first service is less than 20% Etc.
  • the second condition may also be other conditions, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first communication device configures the first resource for the first resource configuration period and the first communication device selects the first resource.
  • the two can be executed sequentially or simultaneously.
  • the first communication device may first configure the period for the first resource and then select the first resource, or may first select the first resource and then configure the period for the first resource.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the execution timing of the first communication device for the first resource configuration period and the first communication device to select the first resource.
  • the period of the first resource is selected as the minimum value of the period of all DRX configurations corresponding to the first service, so that the period of the first communication device waking up to monitor the SCI is the same as the period of sending the first service. Match, thereby improving the probability of effective utilization of side link resources.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method, which can be applied to the above-mentioned communication system.
  • the first communication device may be a TX UE or a RX UE.
  • the second communication device may be a RX UE or a RX UE. TX UE.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method in an embodiment of this application. Referring to FIG. 11, the method may include:
  • the first communication device determines that the first resource pool or the resources in the first resource pool meet the third condition
  • the first resource pool is the resource pool for which the first communication device currently performs resource selection
  • the third condition includes: the channel busy ratio (CBR) of the current resource pool satisfies the fourth condition
  • the fourth condition may be that the CBR is greater than a preset value (which can be an empirical value) or CBR Within the preset range
  • the first communication device triggers resource pool reselection and/or the packet loss rate satisfies the fifth condition.
  • the fifth condition can be that the packet loss rate is greater than the preset value (experience value can be used), or the packet loss rate is within Within the preset range and so on.
  • the third condition may further include one or a combination of the following conditions: CBR satisfies the fourth condition and reaches the first threshold, the number of times the first communication device triggers resource pool reselection reaches the second threshold, The number of times that the packet loss rate of the second communication device meets the fifth condition reaches the third threshold.
  • the first threshold, the second threshold, and the third threshold may be empirical values, such as 3 times, 5 times, or 8 times.
  • the third condition is not limited to the foregoing situations, and there is no specific limitation on this.
  • S1102 The first communication device performs DRX configuration
  • the first communication device After performing S1101, the first communication device performs S1102, so that the first communication device selects a resource pool that can be used for side link transmission.
  • S1103 The first communication device instructs the second communication device to perform DRX configuration.
  • DRX configuration can be understood as DRX configuration based on reserved resources, for example, DRX reconfiguration based on reserved resources, so that the reserved resources are activated in the time domain with the reconfigured DRX There is an overlap between the periods; or, the DRX initial allocation is performed according to the reserved resources, so that the reserved resources overlap with the configured DRX activation period in the time domain.
  • the aforementioned "DRX configuration" can also be understood as enabling or disabling the DRX function, that is to say, the first communication device can instruct the second communication device to configure or cancel the DRX function. DRX function. Further, if the first communication device instructs the second communication device to configure the DRX function, the first communication device can send DRX configuration information to the second communication device at the same time, or the second communication device can configure the DRX configuration information by itself. Of course, The second communication device may also determine the DRX configuration information in other ways, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first communication device may also perform S1103 to instruct the second communication device to select a resource pool that can be used for side link transmission.
  • S1103 may include: the first indication message is used to notify the second communication device that the current resource pool of the first communication device or the resources in the current resource pool meet the third condition; or, the first communication device Send a second instruction message to the second communication device, the second instruction message is used to instruct the second communication device to perform DRX configuration; and/or, the first communication device sends a third instruction message to the second communication device, and the third instruction message is used To indicate DRX configuration information.
  • the DRX configuration information may include part or all of the side link DRX parameters.
  • the DRX parameters may include one or more of the following parameters: SL DRX duration timer (drx-onDurationTimerSL), SL DRX slot compensation (drx-SlotOffsetSL), SL DRX inactivity timer (drx-InactivityTimerSL), SL DRX retransmission timer (drx-RetransmissionTimerSL), SL DRX long cycle start compensation (drx-LongCycleStartOffsetSL), SL DRX long cycle (drx-LongCycleSL), SL DRX short cycle (drx-ShortCycleSL), SL DRX short cycle timer (drx-ShortCycleTimerSL) or SL DRX HARQ round trip time (round trip time, RTT) timer (drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerSL).
  • RTT round trip time
  • the first communication device may also receive a fourth indication message from the second communication device (RX UE), and the fourth indication message is used for To indicate that the packet loss rate or the packet loss rate of the second communication device satisfies the fifth condition, for example, the fifth condition may be that the packet loss rate is greater than a preset value (which can be an empirical value), or the packet loss rate is within a preset range.
  • the fifth condition may also be other conditions, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second communication device may also reach the fourth threshold when the packet loss rate satisfies the fifth condition.
  • the first communication device sends fourth indication information.
  • the fourth indication information may be used to indicate the last packet loss rate or the last packet loss rate that satisfies the fifth condition.
  • the trigger condition for the second communication device to send the fourth indication information may also be other conditions, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a chip or a system-on-chip in a first communication device, and may also be a first communication device for implementing any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the chip or system-on-chip includes a memory, and instructions are stored in the memory. When the instructions are called by the system-on-chip or the chip, the foregoing method is executed.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device in an embodiment of the application. As shown in FIG. 12, the communication device 1200 may include: a determination module 1201; may also include a trigger module 1202, a monitoring module 1203, a configuration module 1204, or an instruction One or more of the modules 1205.
  • the determining module 1201 is configured to determine the first candidate resource and the first service used for side link transmission; the first resource is determined from the first candidate resource, and the first resource is related to the first active period. There is an intersection in the time domain, and the first activation period is determined according to the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service.
  • the determining module 1201 is configured to determine a resource that has an intersection with the first activation period in the time domain among the first candidate resources as the second candidate resource; and determine the first resource from the second candidate resource .
  • the determining module 1201 is further configured to determine the resources included in the first activation period in the time domain among the first candidate resources as the second candidate resources.
  • the foregoing apparatus may further include: a selection module, configured to select a second service, where the DRX activation period corresponding to the second service and the first resource overlap in the time domain.
  • the trigger module 1202 is configured to trigger resource reselection if there is no intersection between the first resource and the DRX activation period corresponding to the third service of the first communication device.
  • the determining module 1201 is further configured to determine the DRX cycle satisfying the second condition in the DRX configuration corresponding to the first service as the first cycle, and the first cycle is the cycle corresponding to the first resource.
  • the determining module 1201 is further configured to determine the first activation period before determining the first candidate resource for side link transmission; the monitoring module 1203 is configured to monitor the SCI during the first activation period , SCI is used to indicate resources used by other communication devices for side link transmission.
  • the above-mentioned device may further include: a measurement module, configured to perform measurement in the first activation period according to the SCI.
  • the determining module 1202 is specifically configured to determine the second resource used for side link transmission; the first candidate resource is determined from the second resource, and the first candidate resource satisfies at least one of the following conditions:
  • the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service in the time domain has an intersection.
  • the first service includes the current service and/or the historical service; in the time domain, the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service and the non-periodic service in the historical service
  • the union has an intersection.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a chip or a system-on-chip in a first communication device, and may also be a first communication device for implementing any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the chip or system-on-chip includes a memory, and instructions are stored in the memory. When the instructions are called by the system-on-chip or the chip, the foregoing method is executed. Still referring to FIG.
  • the determining module 1201 is also used to determine the third resource used for side link transmission; the triggering module 1202 is used to determine if the third resource corresponds to the DRX activation period of the fourth service of the first communication device If there is no intersection, a resource reselection is triggered.
  • there is no intersection between the third resource and the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service including: multiple unions of the DRX activation period corresponding to the third resource and the fourth service do not have an intersection; or, At least one DRX activation period of the multiple DRX activation periods corresponding to the third resource and the fourth service does not have an intersection; or, there is no intersection between the DRX activation periods that meet the preset number of the multiple DRX activation periods corresponding to the third resource and the fourth service.
  • the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service includes at least one of the following: the DRX activation period corresponding to the communication target, the DRX activation period corresponding to the side link connection, the DRX activation period corresponding to the source and target pair, and the side The DRX activation period corresponding to the link link, the DRX activation period corresponding to the logical channel, the DRX activation period corresponding to the resource pool, the DRX activation period corresponding to the side link service, the DRX activation period corresponding to the MAC PDU of the media access control layer protocol data unit , The DRX activation period corresponding to the transport block TB.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a chip or a system-on-chip in a first communication device, and may also be a first communication device for implementing any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the chip or system-on-chip includes a memory, and instructions are stored in the memory. When the instructions are called by the system-on-chip or the chip, the foregoing method is executed.
  • the determining module 1201 is also used to determine the second activation period, which is the union of the DRX activation period in the time domain in at least one DRX configuration; the monitoring module 1203 is also used to determine the second activation period.
  • monitor the side link control information SCI which is used to indicate the resources used by other communication devices for side link transmission;
  • the above-mentioned device may further include: a measurement module, configured to perform measurement in the second activation period according to the SCI.
  • the at least one DRX configuration includes the DRX configuration of the first service.
  • the communication device may be a chip or a system-on-chip in a first communication device, and may also be a first communication device for implementing any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the chip or system-on-chip includes a memory, and instructions are stored in the memory. When the instructions are called by the system-on-chip or the chip, the foregoing method is executed. Still referring to FIG.
  • the determining module 1201 is configured to determine a fourth resource used for side link transmission; determine a third candidate resource from the fourth resource, and the third candidate resource satisfies at least one of the following conditions: There is an intersection of the above union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service.
  • the first service includes the current service and/or historical service; the union of the DRX activation period corresponding to the current service and the non-periodic service in the historical service in the time domain There is an intersection; where the third candidate resource is used to determine the fifth resource for side link transmission.
  • the DRX activation period corresponding to the first service includes at least one of the following: the DRX activation period corresponding to the communication target, the DRX activation period corresponding to the side link connection, the DRX activation period corresponding to the source and target pair, and the side The DRX activation period corresponding to the link link, the DRX activation period corresponding to the logical channel, the DRX activation period corresponding to the resource pool, the DRX activation period corresponding to the side link service, the DRX activation period corresponding to the MAC PDU of the media access control layer protocol data unit , The DRX activation period corresponding to the transport block TB.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a chip or a system-on-chip in a first communication device, and may also be a first communication device for implementing any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the chip or system-on-chip includes a memory, and instructions are stored in the memory. When the instructions are called by the system-on-chip or the chip, the foregoing method is executed. Still referring to FIG.
  • the determining module 1201 is configured to determine that the resources in the first resource pool or the first resource pool meet the third condition, and the first resource pool is the resource pool of the first communication device currently performing resource selection; configuration module 1204, configured to perform DRX configuration for discontinuous reception, and/or an instruction module 1205, configured to instruct the second communication device to perform DRX configuration, and perform side link communication between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the third condition includes at least one of the following: the channel congestion rate CBR of the current resource pool satisfies the fourth condition; the number of times CRB satisfies the fourth condition reaches the first threshold; the first communication device triggers resource pool reselection The number of times that the first communication device triggers resource pool reselection reaches the second threshold; the packet loss rate of the second communication device meets the fifth condition or the number of times the packet loss rate of the second communication device meets the fifth condition reaches the third threshold.
  • the fourth condition includes: CBR is greater than the first preset value, or CBR is located within the first preset interval; and/or, the fifth condition includes: the packet loss rate is greater than the second preset value, Or the packet loss rate is within the second preset interval.
  • the indication module 1205 is configured to send a first indication message to the second communication device, and the first indication message is used to notify the second communication device of the current resource pool of the first communication device or the current resource pool The resource of, satisfies the third condition; or, sends a second indication message to the second communication device, where the second indication message is used to instruct the second communication device to perform DRX configuration; and/or, sends a third indication message to the second communication device, The third indication message is used to indicate DRX configuration information.
  • the foregoing apparatus may further include: a receiving module, configured to receive a fourth indication message from the second communication device, where the fourth indication message is used to indicate the packet loss rate or the packet loss rate satisfies the fifth condition.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another structure of a communication device in an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 1300 may include: a processor 1301, a memory 1302, a bus 1303, an input device 1304, and an output device 1305.
  • the memory 1302 may include a computer storage medium in the form of a volatile and/or nonvolatile memory, such as a read-only memory and/or a random access memory.
  • the memory 1302 may store an operating system, application programs, other program modules, executable code, program data, user account opening data, user subscription data, and the like.
  • the input device 1304 can be used to input commands and information to the first communication device, such as a keyboard or pointing device, such as a mouse, trackball, touchpad, microphone, joystick, game pad, satellite TV antenna, scanner or the like equipment. These input devices may be connected to the processor 1301 through the bus 1303.
  • a keyboard or pointing device such as a mouse, trackball, touchpad, microphone, joystick, game pad, satellite TV antenna, scanner or the like equipment.
  • the output device 1305 can be used to output information to the first communication device.
  • the output device 1305 can also provide other peripheral output devices, such as speakers and/or printing devices. These output devices can also be connected to the first communication device through the bus 1303.
  • the first communication device may be connected to the network through the network interface 1306, for example, connected to a local area network (LAN).
  • LAN local area network
  • the computer-executable instructions stored in the first communication device may be stored in a remote storage device, and are not limited to being stored locally.
  • the processor 1301 in the first communication device executes the executable code or application program stored in the memory 1302, it can execute the method steps on the side of the first communication device in the above embodiment.
  • the specific execution process refer to the above embodiment. This will not be repeated here.
  • the above-mentioned memory 1302 stores computer-executable instructions for realizing the functions of the above-mentioned determination module, trigger module, monitoring module, configuration module, indication module, and measurement module.
  • the functions/implementation processes of the above determination module, trigger module, monitoring module, configuration module, indication module, and measurement module can all be implemented by the processor 1301 in FIG. 13 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1302, and the specific implementation process and functions Refer to the above related embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is another schematic diagram of the architecture of the communication system in the embodiment of the application, see FIG. 14
  • the communication system 10 may include: a first communication device 141, a second communication device 142, and a third communication device 143.
  • the first communication device may be a transmitting terminal device (denoted as TX UE) or Receiving terminal equipment (denoted as RX UE)
  • the second communication equipment can be TX UE, RX UE, network equipment to which TX UE belongs (such as base station) or network equipment to which RX UE belongs (such as base station)
  • the third communication equipment can also be It is the network equipment (such as base station) to which TX UE, RX UE, and TX UE belong or the network equipment (such as base station) to which RX UE belongs.
  • the above-mentioned first communication device may receive the first DRX configuration information configured by the second communication device for the first side link corresponding to the first communication device, and may also receive that the third communication device is The first resource configuration information of the second side link configuration corresponding to the first communication device.
  • the first DRX configuration information may include part or all of the side link DRX parameters.
  • the first DRX configuration information is used to indicate the DRX activation period of the first side link.
  • the DRX activation period may include: DRX activation period (onduration) or active time (active time).
  • the activity duration may include the duration of an activation timer (onduration timer), the duration of a retransmission timer (retransmission timer), and the duration of an inactivity timer (inactivity timer).
  • the active time also includes other time periods. The examples are not specifically limited.
  • the first side link may be a side link between the first communication device and the second communication device, or it may be a side link between the first communication device and other terminal devices (which can be denoted as other UEs). Side link between.
  • the first DRX configuration information can be used for the first side link between the first communication device and the second communication device, and can also be used for the first side link between the first communication device and other UEs.
  • the first side link may be one or more side links
  • the second side link may also be one or more side links.
  • the first side link is a side link
  • the second side link and the first side link may be the same side link, or the second side link and the first side link may be different
  • the side link for example, the first side link is the side link between the TX UE and the RX UE, and the second side link can be the side link between the RX UE and the TX UE, or it can be the RX UE as the side link.
  • the first side link can also be a side link between TX UE or RX UE and other UEs
  • the second side link can be a side link between RX UE and TX UE, or it can be TX UE or RX. Side link between UE and other UEs.
  • the second side link may be one or more of the first side links, that is, the second side link is the first side link Part of the side links or all side links in the road.
  • the first communication device may configure the first DRX configuration information for itself, and the third communication device may configure the first resource configuration information for the first communication device; or the second communication device may be the first communication device Configure the first DRX configuration information, the first communication device configures the first resource configuration information for itself; or, the second communication device may configure the first DRX configuration information for the first communication device, and the third communication device configures the first communication device for the first communication device.
  • Resource configuration information It can be seen that since DRX configuration information and resource configuration information are configured by different subjects, the DRX activation period indicated by the DRX configuration information and the time zone indicated by the resource configuration information may exist in one or more time periods.
  • the intersection of the DRX activation period and the time interval is less than a certain threshold, in this case, it can be called DRX configuration
  • the information does not match the resource configuration information.
  • the aforementioned "one time period" may refer to a time slot corresponding to a time domain interval that has occurred, or may refer to a time slot corresponding to a time domain interval that has not occurred.
  • the time domain interval may be the time domain interval corresponding to the resource configured by the base station for the UE; for mode2, the time domain interval may be the resource pool configured by the base station for the UE, and the peer UE may be the UE.
  • the above-mentioned time domain interval may be represented by symbols, time slots, subframes, system frames, superframes, etc.
  • n DRX activation periods (indicated by DRX configuration information) and the time domain interval (indicated by resource configuration information) overlap the number of time slots less than a preset threshold (such as the total of n onduration and time domain interval) If the number of overlapping time slots is less than b), it can be considered that there is a conflict between the DRX activation period and the time domain interval in one time period; or, the number of timeslots that overlap between n DRX activation periods and the time domain interval divided by n times the DRX activation period If the number of time slots is less than the preset threshold (for example, the total number of overlapping time slots of n onduration and time domain interval/(n ⁇ onduration time slot number) ⁇ a), it can be considered that the DRX activation period and the time domain interval are in the same time period There is a conflict.
  • a preset threshold such as the total of n onduration and time domain interval
  • the above parameters n, a, and b can be determined by the network according to factors such as the CBR and service characteristics of the resource pool, and configured or pre-configured through system information, RRC messages, or MAC CE/SCI; or, the value of n can also be defined It is (the least common multiple of the number of timeslots in onduration and the length of the bitmap of the time domain interval)/the number of timeslots in onduration.
  • the above-mentioned parameters n, a, and b may also have other values, which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the present application provides a communication method.
  • this communication method if the first DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information, the first communication device sends the first information to the second communication device, and/or sends the second information to the third communication device.
  • the first communication device if the activation period indicated by the first DRX configuration information conflicts with the time domain interval indicated by the first resource configuration information in at least one time period, the first communication device sends the second communication device to the second communication device (the first communication device).
  • the main body of the device configuration DRX configuration information sends the first information to request the second communication device to configure the first side link of the first communication device (it can be the initial configuration or reconfiguration) DRX configuration information (at this time,
  • the first resource configuration information may be configured by the first communication device itself, or configured by the third communication device for the first communication device); or, if the activation period indicated by the first DRX configuration information is related to the first resource configuration information If there is a conflict in the indicated time domain interval for at least one time period, the first communication device sends the second information to the third communication device (the main body that configures the resource configuration information for the first communication device) to request the third communication device to be the first communication device.
  • the second side link configuration of a communication device (it can be the initial configuration or reconfiguration) resource configuration information (at this time, the first DRX configuration information can be configured by the second communication device for the first communication device, or it can be It is configured by the first communication device itself).
  • the foregoing first resource configuration information may be current resource configuration information
  • the first DRX configuration information may be DRX configuration information received by the first communication device.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of the fourth flow of the first communication device-side communication method in an embodiment of this application. Referring to the solid line in FIG. 15, the method includes:
  • the first communication device receives the first DRX configuration information from the second communication device;
  • the first communication device receives the first DRX configuration information configured by the second communication device for the first side link.
  • S1502 The first communication device judges whether the first DRX configuration information matches the first resource configuration information; if so, the process ends, if not, execute S1504;
  • the first resource configuration information may be current resource configuration information of the first communication device.
  • the first communication device determines whether the first DRX configuration information matches the current resource configuration information of the first communication device (that is, the first resource configuration information).
  • the above method may further include: S1503: The first communication device receives first resource configuration information from the third communication device.
  • the first communication device receives the first resource configuration information configured by the third communication device for the second side link, and then the first communication device may determine the time domain interval corresponding to the second side link according to the first resource configuration information. Next, the first communication device may perform second side link transmission in the time domain interval. At this time, the first resource configuration information can be understood as the current resource configuration information of the first communication device.
  • the first communication device sends the first information to the second communication device, and/or the first communication device sends the second information to the third communication device.
  • the first communication device when the first communication device determines that the DRX configuration information does not match the current resource configuration information, it may request the second communication device for DRX configuration, and/or request the third communication device for resource configuration , So that the DRX configuration information matches the resource configuration information.
  • the first communication device is a TX UE
  • the second communication device is a RX UE
  • the third communication device is a network device (such as a base station) to which the TX UE belongs.
  • Figure 16 is a schematic diagram of the first scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in the embodiments of this application.
  • the base station to which the RX UE or the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the TX UE, TX UE or TX UE
  • the base station to which it belongs configures the first resource configuration information for the TX UE.
  • the first DRX configuration information can be used for the first side link between the RX UE and the TX UE, and can also be used for the first side link between the RX UE and other UEs
  • the first resource configuration information can be used for It indicates the resources configured by the base station for the TX UE in mode1, and can also be used to indicate the resource pool corresponding to the TX UE in mode2.
  • the TX UE can determine the first resource configuration information by itself. Then, the TX UE performs S1502 after receiving the first DRX configuration information from the RX UE through S1501, and then when the first DRX configuration S1504 is executed when the information does not match the first resource configuration information. At this time, for example, the TX UE may send the first information to the RX UE or re-determine the resource allocation configuration information by itself. Alternatively, the base station to which the TX UE belongs can configure the first resource configuration information for the TX UE.
  • the TX UE executes S1502 after receiving the first DRX configuration information from the RX UE through S1501, and then when the first DRX configuration information matches the first DRX configuration information S1504 is executed when the resource configuration information does not match.
  • the TX UE may send the first information to the RX UE and/or send the second information to the base station to which the TX UE itself belongs.
  • the foregoing S1504 may but is not limited to include the following specific implementation manners:
  • TX UE sends first information to RX UE.
  • Specific implementation manner 1 When the RX UE configures the first DRX configuration information for the TX UE, the TX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information (such as the first information) to the RX UE to request to configure or reconfigure the DRX configuration information for the TX UE .
  • the DRX configuration failure information such as the first information
  • Specific implementation manner 2 When the base station to which the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the TX UE, the TX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information (such as the first information) to the RX UE, and then the RX UE sends to the base station to which it belongs
  • the fourth information is sent to indicate to the base station to which the RX UE belongs that the DRX configuration corresponding to the first side link has failed, so that after receiving the DRX configuration failure information, the base station can correspond to the first DRX configuration information carried in the fourth information
  • the identification information is the first-side link configuration or reconfiguration DRX configuration information.
  • the fourth information may be the above-mentioned DRX configuration failure information, that is, the RX UE forwards the DRX configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs, or the fourth information may also include indication information generated by the RX UE based on the DRX configuration failure information to indicate the first The DRX configuration corresponding to one side link failed.
  • the foregoing DRX configuration failure information or the fourth information may include at least one of the following: third information used to indicate the failure of the DRX configuration (for example, information indicating that the failure cause is SL DRX configuration conflict), identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, It is used to indicate the type of configuration failure that does not match the DRX configuration information and the resource configuration information, the effective duration of not allowing RX UE to configure DRX for TX UE, the first resource configuration information (can be understood as conflicting resource configuration information), and the desired DRX Configuration information (can be understood as recommended DRX configuration information, the desired DRX configuration information can include some DRX parameters such as DRX activation period or all DRX parameters), DRX adjustment amount, and corresponding identification information.
  • the DRX configuration failure information may also include other information, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the above DRX configuration failure information may be a PC5 RRC reconfiguration failure message, where the DRX configuration failure information may be carried in a PC5 RRC message, PC5 MAC CE, SCI bearer, etc.; the above fourth information may be sidelink UE information message, SL failure information message, or SL DRX configuration failure indication information; among them, the fourth information can be carried in RRC message, MAC CE, PUCCH bearer, etc.
  • the TX UE sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • TX UE sends mode switching request information (ie second information) to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to switch the resource allocation mode of TX UE from the first mode to the second mode, and according to the second mode:
  • the first communication device configures or reconfigures resources.
  • the first mode can be mode1 or mode2.
  • the second mode is mode2; or, when the first mode is mode2, the second mode is mode1.
  • TX UE For example, TX UE is currently in mode 1, then TX UE sends mode switching request information to the base station to which it belongs, and the base station responds to the mode switching request information and switches the resource allocation mode of TX UE from mode 1 to mode 2, and then, according to mode 2 is TX UE By reallocating resources, the TX UE can receive the new resource configuration information sent by the base station. Or, TX UE is currently in mode 2, then TX UE sends mode switching request information to the base station to which it belongs, and the base station responds to the mode switching request information and switches the resource allocation mode of TX UE from mode 2 to mode 1, and then, according to mode 1, is TX UE By reallocating resources, the TX UE can receive the new resource configuration information sent by the base station.
  • the TX UE sends resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to configure or reconfigure resources for the TX UE;
  • the resource configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason for indicating that the DRX configuration information does not match the resource configuration information, the first DRX configuration information, the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, and the desired resource configuration information (It can be understood as the recommended resource configuration information) or the amount of resource adjustment.
  • the TX UE sends the first information to the RX UE and also sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • TX UE can first send resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs. After receiving the resource configuration request information, the base station tries to reconfigure and match the TX UE according to the first DRX configuration information carried in the resource configuration request information If the base station can provide matching resources, the base station can send new resource configuration information to the TX UE to indicate the reconfigured resources; otherwise, the base station sends DRX configuration failure information to the TX UE, and the TX UE sends the RX The UE sends DRX configuration failure information;
  • the TX UE may first send resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs, and start a timer when sending the resource configuration request information to the base station. If the timer expires, the TX UE has not received the base station as the first If the resource configuration information of the two-side link is reconfigured, the TX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information to the RX UE.
  • the RX UE may also send fourth information to the base station to which it belongs to indicate to the base station to which the UE belongs that the first side link corresponds
  • the DRX configuration fails, so that after receiving the DRX configuration failure information, the base station can configure the first side link or reconfigure the DRX configuration information according to the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information carried in the fourth information.
  • the TX UE sends resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs, and sends DRX configuration failure information to the RX UE.
  • the resource configuration request information carries the expected resource configuration information and/or the resource adjustment amount;
  • the DRX configuration failure information carries the expected DRX configuration information and/or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information in the above specific embodiment may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel ID, resource pool ID, side link service ID, MAC PDU ID, TB ID.
  • the source identifier may be a source layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a source layer 2 identifier (source L2 ID)
  • the target identifier may be a target layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a target layer 2 identifier (source L1 ID). L2 ID).
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a TX UE
  • the third communication device is a network device (such as a base station) to which the RX UE belongs.
  • Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of the second scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of this application.
  • the base station to which the TX UE or the TX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, RX UE or RX UE
  • the base station to which it belongs configures the first resource configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the first DRX configuration information is used for the first side link between the RX UE and the TX UE, and the first resource configuration information is used to indicate the receiving resource corresponding to the RX UE in mode 2, and the receiving resource is used for the first side link.
  • the RX UE can determine the first resource configuration information by itself. Then, the RX UE executes S1502 after receiving the first DRX configuration information from the TX UE through S1501, and then when the first DRX configuration S1504 is executed when the information does not match the first resource configuration information. At this time, for example, the RX UE may send the first information to the TX UE or re-determine the resource allocation configuration information by itself. Alternatively, the base station to which the RX UE belongs can configure the first resource configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the RX UE executes S1502 after receiving the first DRX configuration information from the TX UE through S1501, and then when the first DRX configuration information matches the first DRX configuration information S1504 is executed when the resource configuration information does not match.
  • the RX UE may send the first information to the TX UE and/or send the second information to the base station to which the RX UE itself belongs.
  • the foregoing S1504 may but is not limited to include the following specific implementation manners:
  • Specific implementation manner 1 When the TX UE configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, the RX UE sends DRX configuration failure information (such as the first information) to the TX UE to request the TX UE to configure or reconfigure the DRX configuration information.
  • DRX configuration failure information such as the first information
  • Specific implementation manner 2 In the case where the base station to which the TX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, the RX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information (such as the first information) to the TX UE, and then the TX UE sends the base station to which it belongs
  • the fourth information is sent to indicate to the base station to which the TX UE belongs that the DRX configuration corresponding to the first side link has failed, so that after receiving the DRX configuration failure information, the base station can correspond to the first DRX configuration information carried in the fourth information
  • the identification information is the first-side link configuration or reconfiguration DRX configuration information.
  • the foregoing DRX configuration failure information or the fourth information may include at least one of the following: third information used to indicate the failure of the DRX configuration (for example, information indicating that the failure cause is SL DRX configuration conflict), identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, It is used to indicate the type of configuration failure that does not match the DRX configuration information and the resource configuration information, the effective duration of the TX UE is not allowed to configure DRX for the RX UE, the first resource configuration information (can be understood as conflicting resource configuration information), and the desired DRX Configuration information (can be understood as recommended DRX configuration information, the desired DRX configuration information can include some DRX parameters such as DRX activation period or all DRX parameters), DRX adjustment amount, and corresponding identification information.
  • the DRX configuration failure information may also include other information, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the RX UE sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • RX UE sends mode switching request information (ie, second information) to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to switch the resource allocation mode of RX UE from the first mode to the second mode, and according to the second mode:
  • the first communication device configures or reconfigures resources. For example, RX UE is currently in mode 2, then RX UE sends mode switching request information to the base station to which it belongs, and the base station responds to the mode switching request information, switches the resource allocation mode of RX UE from mode 2 to mode 1, and then, according to mode 1 is RX UE By reallocating resources, the RX UE can receive the new resource configuration information sent by the base station.
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to configure or reconfigure resources for the RX UE;
  • the resource configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason for indicating that the DRX configuration information does not match the resource configuration information, the first DRX configuration information, the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, and the desired resource configuration information (It can be understood as the recommended resource configuration information) or the amount of resource adjustment.
  • the RX UE sends the first information to the TX UE and also sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • the RX UE can first send resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs. After receiving the resource configuration request information, the base station tries to reconfigure the RX UE according to the first DRX configuration information carried in the resource configuration request information. If the base station can provide matching resources, the base station can send new resource configuration information to the RX UE to indicate the reconfigured resources; otherwise, the base station sends DRX configuration failure information to the RX UE, and the RX UE sends the TX The UE sends DRX configuration failure information;
  • RX UE can first send resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs, and start a timer when sending resource configuration request information to the base station. If the timer expires, RX UE has not received the base station as the first If the resource configuration information of the two-side link is reconfigured, the RX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information to the TX UE.
  • the TX UE may also send fourth information to the base station to which it belongs to indicate to the base station to which the TX UE belongs that the first side link corresponds
  • the DRX configuration fails, so that after receiving the DRX configuration failure information, the base station can configure the first side link or reconfigure the DRX configuration information according to the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information carried in the fourth information.
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs, and sends DRX configuration failure information to the TX UE.
  • the resource configuration request information carries the expected resource configuration information and/or the resource adjustment amount;
  • the DRX configuration failure information carries the expected DRX configuration information and/or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information in the above specific embodiment may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel ID, resource pool ID, side link service ID, MAC PDU ID, TB ID.
  • the source identifier may be a source layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a source layer 2 identifier (source L2 ID)
  • the target identifier may be a target layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a target layer 2 identifier (source L1 ID). L2 ID).
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a RX UE or a network device (such as a base station) to which the RX UE belongs
  • the third communication device is a TX UE.
  • Figure 18 is a schematic diagram of a third scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of this application.
  • the base station to which the RX UE or the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, TX UE or TX UE
  • the base station to which it belongs configures the first resource configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the first resource configuration information may include resource configuration information used to instruct the first communication device to perform sensing.
  • the above-mentioned RX UE may be replaced with “assisted UE”, and TX UE may be replaced with “assisted UE”.
  • the foregoing first resource configuration information may be auxiliary configuration information (for example, including resource configuration information used to instruct the RX UE to perform sensing).
  • the assisted UE sends the auxiliary configuration information to the assisting UE, and the assisting UE may send the auxiliary information (such as one or more resource sets) to the assisted UE according to the auxiliary configuration information.
  • the aforementioned auxiliary UE may be used to assist the assisted UE to determine resource configuration information, and the resource configuration information determined by the assisted UE may be used for the side link corresponding to the assisted UE.
  • the aforementioned auxiliary UE may be understood as a relay (delay) UE
  • the assisted UE may be understood as a remote (remote) UE.
  • the relay UE can assist the remote UE in determining resource configuration information.
  • the resource allocation mode of the RX UE may be for the UE to independently select resources, such as mode 2 or enhanced mode 2 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • enhanced mode2 may include mode2 based on UE (inter) assisted mode2, mode2 based on UE (inter) cooperation, and mode2b.
  • sensing described in the embodiments of this application may include sensing when UE autonomous resource allocation (such as mode 2, mode 4, and related enhancement methods) is used, or it may only refer to some behaviors in sensing (such as Monitor SCI).
  • the foregoing S1504 may but is not limited to include the following specific implementation manners:
  • Specific implementation manner 1 In the case where the base station to which the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, the RX UE sends DRX configuration failure information (such as the first information) to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to fail to receive the DRX configuration After the information arrives, configure or reconfigure DRX configuration information for the first-side link.
  • DRX configuration failure information such as the first information
  • the foregoing DRX configuration failure information may be sidelink UE information, SL failure information, or SL DRX configuration failure indication information; among them, the DRX configuration failure information may be carried in RRC messages, MAC CE, PUCCH bearers, and so on.
  • the foregoing DRX configuration failure information may include at least one of the following: third information used to indicate the failure of the DRX configuration (for example, information indicating that the failure cause is SL DRX configuration conflict), identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, and used to indicate DRX Configuration information and resource configuration information do not match the configuration failure type, TX UE is not allowed to configure the effective duration of DRX for RX UE, first resource configuration information (can be understood as conflicting resource configuration information), desired DRX configuration information (can be Understand as suggested DRX configuration information, the desired DRX configuration information may include part of DRX parameters such as DRX activation period or all DRX parameters), DRX adjustment amount, and corresponding identification information.
  • the DRX configuration failure information may also include other information, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the RX UE sends the second information to the TX UE;
  • RX UE sends mode switching request information (ie second information) to TX UE to request TX UE to switch the resource allocation mode of RX UE from the first mode to the second mode, and according to the second mode as the first mode
  • a communication device configures or reconfigures resources. For example, if RX UE is currently in mode 2, then RX UE sends mode switch request information to TX UE. TX UE responds to the mode switch request information and switches the resource allocation mode of RX UE from mode 2 to mode 1, and then re-sets RX UE according to mode 1. After allocating resources, the RX UE can receive the new resource configuration information sent by the TX UE.
  • mode switching request information ie second information
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration request information to the TX UE to request the TX UE to configure or reconfigure resources for the RX UE;
  • the resource configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason for indicating that the DRX configuration information does not match the resource configuration information, the first DRX configuration information, the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, and the desired resource configuration information (It can be understood as the recommended resource configuration information) or the amount of resource adjustment.
  • the RX UE sends the first information to the base station to which it belongs, and also sends the second information to the TX UE;
  • the RX UE may first send resource configuration request information to the TX UE. After receiving the resource configuration request information, the TX UE tries to reconfigure the RX UE according to the first DRX configuration information carried in the resource configuration request information. Resources, if the TX UE can provide matching resources, the TX UE can send new resource configuration information to the RX UE to indicate the reconfigured resources; otherwise, the TX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information to the RX UE, and the RX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information to the RX UE. Send DRX configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • RX UE can first send resource configuration request information to TX UE, and start a timer when sending resource configuration request information to TX UE, if the timer expires, RX UE has not received TX UE is the first If the resource configuration information of the two-side link is reconfigured, the RX UE sends DRX configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs.
  • the TX UE may also send resource configuration request information (such as the fourth information) to the base station to which the TX UE belongs, so as to inform the base station to which the TX UE belongs. Instructing to perform resource reconfiguration for the first side link, so that the base station configures or reconfigures the resource configuration information for the first side link after receiving the resource configuration request information.
  • resource configuration request information such as the fourth information
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration request information to the TX UE, and sends DRX configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs.
  • the resource configuration request information carries the expected DRX configuration information and/or the DRX adjustment amount; the DRX configuration failure information carries the expected resource configuration information and/or the resource adjustment amount.
  • the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information in the above specific embodiment may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel ID, resource pool ID, side link service ID, MAC PDU ID, TB ID.
  • the source identifier may be a source layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a source layer 2 identifier (source L2 ID)
  • the target identifier may be a target layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a target layer 2 identifier (source L1 ID). L2 ID).
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a TX UE
  • the third communication device is a network device (such as a base station) to which the RX UE belongs.
  • Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of the fourth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of this application.
  • the TX UE or the base station to which the TX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, RX UE or RX UE
  • the base station to which it belongs configures the first resource configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the first DRX configuration resource is used for the first side link between the RX UE and the TX UE
  • the first resource configuration information is used for the RX UE as the second link between the TX UE and other UEs (that is, the fourth communication device).
  • Side link the first resource configuration information is used to instruct the RX UE to send side link data on the second side link. It can also be understood that the first resource configuration information is used to RX UE (as TX UE) to other UEs (ie The fourth communication device) sends side link data.
  • the RX UE can determine the first resource configuration information by itself. Then, the RX UE executes S1502 after receiving the first DRX configuration information from the TX UE through S1501, and then the first DRX configuration S1504 is executed when the information does not match the first resource configuration information. At this time, for example, the RX UE may send the first information to the TX UE or re-determine the resource configuration information by itself. Alternatively, the base station to which the RX UE belongs can configure the first resource configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the RX UE executes S1502 after receiving the first DRX configuration information from the TX UE through S1501, and then when the first DRX configuration information matches the first DRX configuration information S1504 is executed when the resource configuration information does not match.
  • the RX UE may send the first information to the TX UE and/or send the second information to the base station to which the RX UE itself belongs.
  • the foregoing S1504 may but is not limited to include the following specific implementation manners:
  • Specific implementation manner 1 When the TX UE configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, the RX UE sends DRX configuration failure information (such as the first information) to the TX UE to request the TX UE to configure or reconfigure the DRX configuration information .
  • DRX configuration failure information such as the first information
  • Specific implementation manner 2 In the case where the base station to which the TX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, the RX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information (such as the first information) to the TX UE, and then the TX UE sends the base station to which it belongs
  • the fourth information is sent to indicate to the base station to which the TX UE belongs that the DRX configuration corresponding to the first side link has failed, so that after receiving the DRX configuration failure information, the base station can correspond to the first DRX configuration information carried in the fourth information
  • the identification information is the first-side link configuration or reconfiguration DRX configuration information.
  • the foregoing DRX configuration failure information may include at least one of the following: third information used to indicate the failure of the DRX configuration (for example, information indicating that the failure cause is SL DRX configuration conflict), identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, and used to indicate DRX Configuration information and resource configuration information do not match the configuration failure type, TX UE is not allowed to configure the effective duration of DRX for RX UE, first resource configuration information (can be understood as conflicting resource configuration information), desired DRX configuration information (can be Understand as suggested DRX configuration information, the desired DRX configuration information may include part of DRX parameters such as DRX activation period or all DRX parameters), DRX adjustment amount, and corresponding identification information.
  • the DRX configuration failure information may also include other information, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the RX UE sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • RX UE sends mode switching request information (ie, second information) to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to switch the resource allocation mode of RX UE from the first mode to the second mode, and according to the second mode:
  • the first communication device configures or reconfigures resources. For example, RX UE is currently in mode 2, then RX UE sends mode switching request information to the base station to which it belongs, and the base station responds to the mode switching request information, switches the resource allocation mode of RX UE from mode 2 to mode 1, and then, according to mode 1 is RX UE By reallocating resources, the RX UE can receive the new resource configuration information sent by the base station.
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to configure or reconfigure resources for the RX UE;
  • the resource configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason for indicating that the DRX configuration information does not match the resource configuration information, the first DRX configuration information, the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, and the desired resource configuration information (It can be understood as the recommended resource configuration information) or the amount of resource adjustment.
  • the RX UE sends the first information to the TX UE and also sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • the RX UE can first send resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs. After receiving the resource configuration request information, the base station tries to reconfigure the RX UE according to the first DRX configuration information carried in the resource configuration request information. If the base station can provide matching resources, the base station can send new resource configuration information to the RX UE to indicate the reconfigured resources; otherwise, the base station sends DRX configuration failure information to the RX UE, and the RX UE sends the TX The UE sends DRX configuration failure information;
  • RX UE can first send resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs, and start a timer when sending resource configuration request information to the base station. If the timer expires, RX UE has not received the base station as the first If the resource configuration information of the two-side link is reconfigured, the RX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information to the TX UE.
  • the TX UE may also send fourth information to the base station to which it belongs to indicate to the base station to which the TX UE belongs that the first side link corresponds
  • the DRX configuration fails, so that after receiving the DRX configuration failure information, the base station can configure the first side link or reconfigure the DRX configuration information according to the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information carried in the fourth information.
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs, and sends DRX configuration failure information to the TX UE.
  • the resource configuration request information carries the expected resource configuration information and/or the resource adjustment amount;
  • the DRX configuration failure information carries the expected DRX configuration information and/or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information in the above specific embodiment may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel ID, resource pool ID, side link service ID, MAC PDU ID, TB ID.
  • the source identifier may be a source layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a source layer 2 identifier (source L2 ID)
  • the target identifier may be a target layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a target layer 2 identifier (source L1 ID). L2 ID).
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a RX UE or a network device (such as a base station) to which the RX UE belongs
  • the third communication device is a TX UE.
  • Figure 20 is a schematic diagram of the fifth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of this application.
  • the base station to which the RX UE or the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, TX UE or TX UE
  • the base station to which it belongs configures first resource configuration information for the RX UE; where the first resource configuration information is used to indicate one or more resource sets corresponding to the RX UE.
  • the aforementioned RX UE can be replaced with "assisted UE", “scheduled UE” or “member UE”; TX UE can be replaced with "assisted UE", “scheduled UE” or “head UE” .
  • the above-mentioned first resource configuration information may be auxiliary information, which is used to indicate one or more resource sets.
  • the assisted UE sends the auxiliary configuration information to the assisting UE, and the assisting UE may send the auxiliary information to the assisted UE according to the auxiliary configuration information.
  • the resource allocation mode of the RX UE can be the UE's autonomous selection of resources, such as the mode 2 or the enhanced mode 2 described in the foregoing embodiment.
  • enhanced mode2 may include mode2 based on UE (inter) assisted mode2, mode2 based on UE (inter) cooperation, and mode2d.
  • the aforementioned auxiliary UE may be used to assist the assisted UE to determine resource configuration information, and the resource configuration information determined by the assisted UE may be used for the side link corresponding to the assisted UE.
  • the aforementioned auxiliary UE may be understood as a relay (delay) UE
  • the assisted UE may be understood as a remote (remote) UE.
  • the relay UE may assist the remote UE in determining the resource configuration information. For example, the relay UE sends the first resource configuration information configured by the base station to the remote UE.
  • the foregoing S1504 may but is not limited to include the following specific implementation manners:
  • Specific implementation manner 1 In the case that the base station to which the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, the RX UE sends DRX configuration failure information (such as the first information) to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to receive the DRX configuration After the failure information arrives, configure or reconfigure the DRX configuration information for the first-side link.
  • DRX configuration failure information such as the first information
  • the aforementioned DRX configuration failure information can be sidelink UE information, SL failure information, or SL DRX configuration failure indication information, where the SL DRX configuration failure indication information can be carried in the RRC message, MAC CE, SCI, etc. .
  • the foregoing DRX configuration failure information may include at least one of the following: third information used to indicate the failure of the DRX configuration (for example, information indicating that the failure cause is SL DRX configuration conflict), identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, and used to indicate DRX Configuration information and resource configuration information do not match the configuration failure type, TX UE is not allowed to configure the effective duration of DRX for RX UE, first resource configuration information (can be understood as conflicting resource configuration information), desired DRX configuration information (can be Understand as suggested DRX configuration information, the desired DRX configuration information may include part of DRX parameters such as DRX activation period or all DRX parameters), DRX adjustment amount, and corresponding identification information.
  • the DRX configuration failure information may also include other information, which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the RX UE sends the second information to the TX UE;
  • RX UE sends mode switching request information (ie second information) to TX UE to request TX UE to switch the resource allocation mode of RX UE from the first mode to the second mode, and according to the second mode as the first mode
  • a communication device configures or reconfigures resources. For example, if RX UE is currently in mode 2, then RX UE sends mode switch request information to TX UE. TX UE responds to the mode switch request information and switches the resource allocation mode of RX UE from mode 2 to mode 1, and then re-sets RX UE according to mode 1. After allocating resources, the RX UE can receive the new resource configuration information sent by the TX UE.
  • mode switching request information ie second information
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration request information to the TX UE to request the TX UE to configure or reconfigure resources for the RX UE;
  • the resource configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason for indicating that the DRX configuration information does not match the resource configuration information, the first DRX configuration information, the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, and the desired resource configuration information (It can be understood as the recommended resource configuration information) or the amount of resource adjustment.
  • the RX UE sends the first information to the base station to which it belongs, and also sends the second information to the TX UE;
  • the RX UE may first send resource configuration request information to the TX UE. After receiving the resource configuration request information, the TX UE attempts to reconfigure the RX UE according to the first DRX configuration information carried in the resource configuration request information. Resources, if the TX UE can provide matching resources, the TX UE can send new resource configuration information to the RX UE to indicate the reconfigured resources; otherwise, the TX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information to the RX UE, and the RX UE sends the DRX configuration failure information to the RX UE. Send DRX configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • RX UE can first send resource configuration request information to TX UE, and start a timer when sending resource configuration request information to TX UE, if the timer expires, RX UE has not received TX UE is the first If the resource configuration information of the two-side link is reconfigured, the RX UE sends DRX configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs.
  • the TX UE may also send resource configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs to indicate the base station to which the TX UE belongs as the first side chain
  • the path performs resource reconfiguration, so that the base station configures or reconfigures the resource configuration information for the first-side link after receiving the resource configuration request information.
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration request information to the TX UE, and sends DRX configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs.
  • the resource configuration request information carries the expected resource configuration information and/or the resource adjustment amount;
  • the DRX configuration failure information carries the expected DRX configuration information and/or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information in the above specific embodiment may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel ID, resource pool ID, side link service ID, MAC PDU ID, TB ID.
  • the source identifier may be a source layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a source layer 2 identifier (source L2 ID)
  • the target identifier may be a target layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a target layer 2 identifier (source L1 ID). L2 ID).
  • the foregoing first resource configuration information may be resource configuration information received by the first communication device, and the first DRX configuration information may be current DRX configuration information of the first communication device.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the fifth flow of the first communication device-side communication method in an embodiment of this application. Referring to the solid line in FIG. 21, the method includes:
  • the first communication device receives first resource configuration information from the third communication device;
  • the first communication device receives the first resource configuration information configured by the third communication device for the second side link.
  • S2102 The first communication device judges whether the first resource configuration information matches the first DRX configuration information; if so, the process ends, if not, execute S2104;
  • the first DRX configuration information may be current DRX configuration information of the first communication device.
  • the first communication device determines whether the first resource configuration information matches the current DRX configuration information of the first communication device (that is, the first DRX configuration information).
  • the above method may further include: S2103: The first communication device receives the first DRX configuration information from the second communication device.
  • the first communication device receives the first DRX configuration information configured by the second communication device for the first side link, and then the first communication device may perform discontinuous reception according to the first DRX configuration information.
  • the first DRX configuration information can be understood as the current DRX configuration information of the first communication device.
  • S2104 The first communication device sends the first information to the second communication device, and/or the first communication device sends the second information to the third communication device.
  • the first communication device when the first communication device determines that the resource configuration information does not match the current DRX configuration information, it may request the second communication device for DRX configuration, and/or request the third communication device for resource configuration , So that the DRX configuration information matches the resource configuration information.
  • the first communication device is a TX UE
  • the second communication device is a RX UE
  • the third communication device is a network device (such as a base station) to which the TX UE belongs.
  • Figure 22 is a schematic diagram of the sixth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in the embodiments of this application.
  • the base station to which TX UE, RX UE or RX UE belongs configures first DRX configuration information for TX UE
  • TX UE The base station to which it belongs configures the first resource configuration information for the TX UE.
  • the first resource configuration information may be used to indicate the resources configured by the base station for the TX UE in mode 1, and may also be used to indicate the resource pool corresponding to the TX UE in mode 2.
  • the TX UE can determine the first DRX configuration information by itself. Then, the TX UE performs S2102 after receiving the first resource configuration information from the base station to which the TX UE belongs through S2101, and then acts as the first DRX configuration information. When the DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information, S2104 is executed. At this time, for example, the TX UE may send the second information to the base station to which the TX UE belongs or re-determine the DRX configuration information by itself. Or, the base station to which the RX UE or the RX UE belongs can configure the first DRX configuration information for the TX UE.
  • the TX UE executes S2102 after receiving the first resource configuration information from the base station to which the TX UE belongs through S2101, and then acts as the first DRX configuration information.
  • S2104 is performed when the DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information.
  • the TX UE may send the first information to the RX UE and/or send the second information to the base station to which the TX UE belongs.
  • the foregoing S2104 may but is not limited to include the following specific implementation manners:
  • TX UE sends first information to RX UE.
  • Specific implementation manner 1 In the case that the RX UE or the base station to which the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the TX UE, the TX UE sends the DRX configuration request information (such as the first information) to the RX UE to request configuration for the TX UE Or reconfigure the DRX configuration information.
  • the DRX configuration request information such as the first information
  • the aforementioned DRX configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason for indicating a mismatch between DRX configuration information and resource configuration information, first resource configuration information, identification information corresponding to the first resource configuration information, and first DRX configuration information And identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information.
  • the aforementioned DRX configuration request information may be a PC5 RRC reconfiguration failure message, where the DRX configuration request information may be carried in a PC5 RRC message, PC5 MAC CE, SCI bearer, and so on.
  • the TX UE sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • TX UE sends mode switching request information (ie, second information) to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to switch the resource allocation mode of TX UE from the first mode to the second mode, and follow the second mode as
  • the first communication device configures or reconfigures resources. For example, TX UE is currently in mode 2, then TX UE sends mode switching request information to the base station to which it belongs, and the base station responds to the mode switching request information and switches the resource allocation mode of TX UE from mode 2 to mode 1, and then, according to mode 1, is TX UE By reallocating resources, the TX UE can receive the new resource configuration information sent by the base station.
  • the TX UE is currently in mode 1, then the TX UE sends the mode switching request information to the base station to which it belongs, and the base station responds to the mode switching request information and switches the resource allocation mode of the TX UE from mode 1 to mode 2, and then, according to mode 2 is TX UE By re-allocating resources, the TX UE can receive the new resource configuration information sent by the base station.
  • the TX UE sends resource configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to configure or reconfigure resources for the TX UE;
  • the aforementioned resource configuration failure information may include at least one of the following: fourth information used to indicate resource configuration failure, used to indicate a configuration failure type that does not match the resource configuration information and DRX configuration information, and the first DRX configuration information (first DRX configuration information)
  • the DRX configuration information may include partial DRX parameters such as DRX activation period or all DRX parameters), identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, desired resource configuration information (can be understood as recommended resource configuration information) or resource adjustment amount.
  • the TX UE sends the first information to the RX UE and also sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • the TX UE can first send resource configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs. After receiving the resource configuration failure information, the base station tries to reconfigure the TX UE according to the first DRX configuration information carried in the resource configuration failure information. If the base station can provide matching resources, the base station can send new resource configuration information to the TX UE to indicate the reconfigured resources; otherwise, the base station sends resource configuration failure information to the TX UE, and the TX UE sends the RX UE sends DRX configuration request information;
  • TX UE sends resource configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs, and sends DRX configuration request information to RX UE.
  • the resource configuration failure information carries the expected resource configuration information and/or the resource adjustment amount;
  • the DRX configuration request information carries the expected DRX configuration information and/or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information in the above specific embodiment may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel ID, resource pool ID, side link service ID, MAC PDU ID, TB ID.
  • the source identifier may be a source layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a source layer 2 identifier (source L2 ID)
  • the target identifier may be a target layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a target layer 2 identifier (source L1 ID). L2 ID).
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the RX UE belongs (such as a base station
  • the third communication device is a TX UE.
  • Figure 23 is the resource configuration and DRX configuration in the embodiment of this application
  • the base station to which the RX UE, TX UE or TX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE
  • the base station to which the RX UE belongs configures the first resource configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the first resource configuration information is used to indicate the receiving resource corresponding to RX UE in mode2.
  • the RX UE can determine the first DRX configuration information by itself. Then, the RX UE performs S2102 after receiving the first resource configuration information from the base station to which the RX UE belongs through S2101, and then acts as the first DRX configuration information. When the DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information, S2104 is executed. At this time, for example, the RX UE may send the second information to the base station to which the RX UE belongs or re-determine the DRX configuration information by itself. Alternatively, the TX UE or the base station to which the TX UE belongs can configure the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the RX UE performs S2102 after receiving the first resource configuration information from the base station to which the RX UE belongs through S2101, and then acts as the first DRX configuration information.
  • S2104 is executed when the DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information.
  • the RX UE may send the first information to the TX UE and/or send the second information to the base station to which the RX UE belongs.
  • the foregoing S2104 may but is not limited to include the following specific implementation manners:
  • Specific implementation manner 1 In the case that the TX UE or the base station to which the TX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, the RX UE sends DRX configuration request information (such as the first information) to the TX UE to request configuration for the TX UE Or reconfigure the DRX configuration information.
  • DRX configuration request information such as the first information
  • the above-mentioned DRX configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason for indicating that the DRX configuration information does not match the resource configuration information, the first resource configuration information, the identification information corresponding to the first resource configuration information, and the desired DRX configuration information And the amount of DRX adjustment.
  • the RX UE sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to configure or reconfigure resources for the TX UE;
  • the aforementioned resource configuration failure information may include at least one of the following: fifth information used to indicate resource configuration failure, used to indicate a configuration failure type that does not match the resource configuration information and DRX configuration information, and the first DRX configuration information (first DRX configuration information)
  • the DRX configuration information may include partial DRX parameters such as DRX activation period or all DRX parameters), identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, desired resource configuration information (can be understood as recommended resource configuration information) or resource adjustment amount.
  • the RX UE sends the first information to the TX UE and also sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs, and sends DRX configuration request information to the TX UE.
  • the resource configuration failure information carries the expected resource configuration information and/or the resource adjustment amount;
  • the DRX configuration request information carries the expected DRX configuration information and/or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information in the above specific embodiment may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel ID, resource pool ID, side link service ID, MAC PDU ID, TB ID.
  • the source identifier may be a source layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a source layer 2 identifier (source L2 ID)
  • the target identifier may be a target layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a target layer 2 identifier (source L1 ID). L2 ID).
  • the eighth scenario is similar to the scenario of the third scenario above.
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a network device (such as a base station) to which the RX UE belongs
  • the third communication device is a TX UE.
  • Figure 24 is a schematic diagram of the eighth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of this application.
  • the base station to which the RX UE or the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, TX UE or TX UE
  • the base station to which it belongs configures the first resource configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the first resource configuration information may include resource configuration information used to instruct the RX UE to perform sensing.
  • the RX UE can determine the first DRX configuration information by itself. Then, the RX UE receives the first resource configuration information from the TX UE through S2101 (including the information used to instruct the RX UE to perceive Resource configuration information) and then execute S2102, and then execute S2104 when the first DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information. At this time, for example, the RX UE can send the second information to the TX UE or re-determine the DRX configuration by itself information. Or, the base station to which the RX UE belongs can configure the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the RX UE executes S2102 after receiving the first resource configuration information from the TX UE through S2101, and then when the first DRX configuration information matches the first DRX configuration information S2104 is executed when the resource configuration information does not match.
  • the RX UE may send the first information to the base station to which the RX UE belongs and/or send the second information to the TX UE.
  • the foregoing S2104 may but is not limited to include the following specific implementation manners:
  • TX UE sends first information to RX UE.
  • Specific implementation manner 1 In the case where the base station to which the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, the RX UE sends DRX configuration request information (such as the first information) to the base station to which the RX UE belongs to request configuration or Reconfigure the DRX configuration information.
  • DRX configuration request information such as the first information
  • the above-mentioned DRX configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason for indicating that the DRX configuration information does not match the resource configuration information, the first resource configuration information, the identification information corresponding to the first resource configuration information, and the desired DRX configuration information And the amount of DRX adjustment.
  • the RX UE sends the second information to the TX UE;
  • RX UE sends mode switching request information (ie second information) to TX UE to request TX UE to switch the resource allocation mode of RX UE from the first mode to the second mode, and according to the second mode as the first mode
  • a communication device configures or reconfigures resources. For example, if RX UE is currently in mode 2, then RX UE sends mode switch request information to TX UE. TX UE responds to the mode switch request information and switches the resource allocation mode of RX UE from mode 2 to mode 1, and then re-sets RX UE according to mode 1. After allocating resources, the RX UE can receive the new resource configuration information sent by the base station.
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration failure information to the TX UE to request the TX UE to configure or reconfigure resources for the RX UE;
  • the aforementioned resource configuration failure information may include at least one of the following: fifth information used to indicate resource configuration failure, used to indicate a configuration failure type that does not match the resource configuration information and DRX configuration information, and the first DRX configuration information (first DRX configuration information)
  • the DRX configuration information may include partial DRX parameters such as DRX activation period or all DRX parameters), identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, desired resource configuration information (can be understood as recommended resource configuration information) or resource adjustment amount.
  • the RX UE sends the first information to the base station to which it belongs, and also sends the second information to the TX UE;
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration failure information to the TX UE, and sends DRX configuration request information to the base station to which the RX UE belongs.
  • the resource configuration failure information carries the expected resource configuration information and/or the resource adjustment amount;
  • the DRX configuration request information carries the expected DRX configuration information and/or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information in the foregoing specific embodiments may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target pair identification, side link link identification, logical channel ID, resource pool ID, side link service ID, MAC PDU ID, TB ID.
  • the source identifier may be a source layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a source layer 2 identifier (source L2 ID)
  • the target identifier may be a target layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a target layer 2 identifier (source L1 ID). L2 ID).
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a TX UE
  • the third communication device is a network device (such as a base station) to which the RX UE belongs.
  • Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the first scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of this application. As shown in Figure 25, RX UE, TX UE, or base station to which TX UE belongs configures first DRX configuration information for RX UE, RX UE The base station to which it belongs configures the first resource configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the first DRX configuration resource is used for the first side link between the RX UE and the TX UE
  • the first resource configuration information is used for the RX UE as the second link between the TX UE and other UEs (that is, the fourth communication device).
  • Side link the first resource configuration information is used to instruct the RX UE to send side link data on the second side link.
  • the first resource configuration information is used to RX UE (as TX UE) to other UEs ( That is, the fourth communication device) sends side link data.
  • the RX UE can determine the first DRX configuration information by itself. Then, the RX UE performs S2102 after receiving the first resource configuration information from the base station to which the RX UE belongs through S2101, and then performs S2102. When the DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information, S2104 is executed. At this time, for example, the RX UE may send the second information to the base station to which the RX UE belongs or re-determine the DRX configuration information by itself. Alternatively, the TX UE or the base station to which the TX UE belongs can configure the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the RX UE performs S2102 after receiving the first resource configuration information from the base station to which the RX UE belongs through S2101, and then acts as the first DRX configuration information.
  • S2104 is executed when the DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information.
  • the RX UE may send the first information to the TX UE and/or send the second information to the base station to which the RX UE belongs.
  • the foregoing S2104 may but is not limited to include the following specific implementation manners:
  • Specific implementation manner 1 In the case where the TX UE or the base station to which the TX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, the RX UE sends the DRX configuration request information (such as the first information) to the TX UE, and the request is the TX UE or The base station to which the TX belongs configures or reconfigures DRX configuration information.
  • the DRX configuration request information such as the first information
  • the aforementioned DRX configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason for indicating a mismatch between DRX configuration information and resource configuration information, first resource configuration information, identification information corresponding to the first resource configuration information, and first DRX configuration information And identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information.
  • the RX UE sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration failure information (such as second information) to the base station to which it belongs to request the base station to configure or reconfigure resources for the RX UE;
  • the aforementioned resource configuration failure information may include at least one of the following: fifth information used to indicate resource configuration failure, used to indicate a configuration failure type that does not match the resource configuration information and DRX configuration information, and the first DRX configuration information (first DRX configuration information)
  • the DRX configuration information may include partial DRX parameters such as DRX activation period or all DRX parameters), identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, desired resource configuration information (can be understood as recommended resource configuration information) or resource adjustment amount.
  • the RX UE sends the first information to the TX UE and also sends the second information to the base station to which it belongs;
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs, and sends DRX configuration request information to the TX UE.
  • the resource configuration failure information carries the expected resource configuration information and/or the resource adjustment amount;
  • the DRX configuration request information carries the expected DRX configuration information and/or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information in the above specific embodiment may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel ID, resource pool ID, side link service ID, MAC PDU ID, TB ID.
  • the source identifier may be a source layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a source layer 2 identifier (source L2 ID)
  • the target identifier may be a target layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a target layer 2 identifier (source L1 ID). L2 ID).
  • the tenth case is similar to the fifth case above.
  • the first communication device is a TX UE
  • the second communication device is a network device (such as a base station) to which the TX UE belongs
  • the third communication device is a TX UE or RX UE.
  • Figure 26 is a schematic diagram of the tenth scenario of resource configuration and DRX configuration in an embodiment of this application.
  • the base station to which the RX UE or the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, TX UE or TX UE
  • the base station to which it belongs configures the first resource configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the first resource configuration information is used to indicate one or more resource sets corresponding to the RX UE.
  • the RX UE can determine the first DRX configuration information by itself. Then, the RX UE executes S2102 after receiving the first resource configuration information from the TX UE through S2101, and then when the first DRX configuration is S2104 is executed when the information does not match the first resource configuration information. At this time, for example, the RX UE may send the second information to the TX UE or re-determine the DRX configuration information by itself. Or, the base station to which the RX UE belongs can configure the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE.
  • the RX UE executes S2102 after receiving the first resource configuration information from the TX UE through S2101, and then when the first DRX configuration information matches the first DRX configuration information S2104 is executed when the resource configuration information does not match.
  • the RX UE may send the first information to the base station to which the RX UE belongs and/or send the second information to the TX UE.
  • the foregoing S2104 may but is not limited to include the following specific implementation manners:
  • Specific implementation manner 1 When the base station to which the RX UE belongs configures the first DRX configuration information for the RX UE, the RX UE sends DRX configuration request information (such as the first information) to the base station to request configuration or reconfiguration for the RX UE DRX configuration information.
  • DRX configuration request information such as the first information
  • the aforementioned DRX configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason for indicating a mismatch between DRX configuration information and resource configuration information, first resource configuration information, identification information corresponding to the first resource configuration information, and first DRX configuration information (The first DRX configuration information may include part of DRX parameters such as the DRX activation period or include all DRX parameters) and identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information.
  • the RX UE sends the second information to the TX UE;
  • RX UE sends mode switching request information (such as second information) to TX UE to request TX UE to switch the resource allocation mode of RX UE from the first mode to the second mode, and according to the second mode as the first mode
  • a communication device configures or reconfigures resources. For example, if RX UE is currently in mode 2, then RX UE sends mode switch request information to TX UE. TX UE responds to the mode switch request information and switches the resource allocation mode of RX UE from mode 2 to mode 1, and then re-sets RX UE according to mode 1. After allocating resources, the RX UE can receive the new resource configuration information sent by the base station.
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration failure information to the TX UE to request the TX UE to configure or reconfigure resources for the RX UE;
  • the aforementioned resource configuration failure information may include at least one of the following: fourth information used to indicate resource configuration failure, used to indicate a configuration failure type that does not match the resource configuration information and DRX configuration information, and the first DRX configuration information (first DRX configuration information)
  • the DRX configuration information may include partial DRX parameters such as DRX activation period or all DRX parameters), identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, desired resource configuration information (can be understood as recommended resource configuration information) or resource adjustment amount.
  • the RX UE sends the first information to the base station to which it belongs, and also sends the second information to the TX UE;
  • the RX UE sends resource configuration failure information to the TX UE, and sends DRX configuration request information to the base station to which it belongs.
  • the resource configuration failure information carries the expected resource configuration information and/or the resource adjustment amount;
  • the DRX configuration request information carries the expected DRX configuration information and/or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information in the above specific embodiment may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel ID, resource pool ID, side link service ID, MAC PDU ID, TB ID.
  • the source identifier may be a source layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a source layer 2 identifier (source L2 ID)
  • the target identifier may be a target layer 1 identifier (source L1 ID) or a target layer 2 identifier (source L1 ID). L2 ID).
  • the first communication device determines that the first resource configuration information does not match the first DRX configuration information (that is, the SL resource and the SL DRX), it sends the first information to the second communication device and/or sends the first information to the third communication device.
  • the communication device sends the second information, so that the SL resource configured by the second communication device and/or the third communication device matches the SL DRX.
  • the first communication device determines that the SL resource does not match the SL DRX
  • the first communication device only needs to send the SL DRX configuration to the SL resource configuration body (base station or UE), which can save the first communication device to SL resources
  • the configuration body sends its related SL DRX signaling overhead; when the first communication device determines that the SL resource does not match the SL DRX, the first communication device only needs to send the SL resource configuration to the SL DRX configuration body (base station or UE), It can save the signaling overhead of the first communication device sending its related SL resource configuration to the SL DRX configuration body.
  • the UE judges that the SL resource does not match the SL DRX, it indicates the unmatched SL resource configuration/suggested SL DRX configuration to the SL DRX configuration body, or indicates the unmatched SL DRX configuration/suggestion to the SL resource configuration body Or, indicate the recommended SL DRX configuration to the SL DRX configuration body while indicating the recommended SL resource configuration to the SL resource configuration body, so that the SL resources that are subsequently reconfigured match the SL DRX.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a chip or a system-on-chip in a first communication device, and may also be a first communication device for implementing any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the chip or system-on-chip includes a memory, and instructions are stored in the memory. When the instructions are called by the system-on-chip or the chip, the foregoing method is executed.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device in an embodiment of the application. Referring to FIG. 27, the communication device 2700 may include: a sending module 2701; and may also include a receiving module 2702 and/or a matching module 2703.
  • the sending module 2701 is configured to send the first information to the second communication device and/or to the third communication device if the first discontinuously received DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information The device sends the second information.
  • the first DRX configuration information is used for the first side link corresponding to the first communication device
  • the first resource configuration information is used for the second side link corresponding to the first communication device
  • the first information is used to indicate the second communication device Perform DRX configuration for the first side link
  • the second information is used to instruct the third communication device to perform resource configuration for the second side link.
  • the first side link may be one or more side links
  • the second side link may also be one or more side links.
  • the first side link is a side link
  • the second side link and the first side link may be the same side link, or the second side link and the first side link may be different Side link
  • the second side link can be one or more of the first side links, that is, the second side link is the first side link Part of the side links or all of the side links in the link.
  • the DRX activation period indicated by the first DRX configuration information and the time zone indicated by the first resource configuration information may be There may be conflicts in one or more time periods. At this time, it can be said that the first DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information.
  • one time period may refer to a time slot corresponding to a time domain interval that has occurred, or may refer to a time slot corresponding to a time domain interval that has not occurred.
  • the DRX activation period indicated by the first DRX configuration information and the time domain interval indicated by the first resource configuration information conflict in one time period, including: n time slots in which the DRX activation period overlaps the time domain interval
  • the number is less than the preset threshold, and n is a positive integer.
  • the number of timeslots in the n DRX activation period overlapping the time domain interval is less than the preset threshold, including: the number of overlapping timeslots divided by n times the number of timeslots in the DRX activation period is less than the preset threshold.
  • the first resource configuration information is the current resource configuration information of the first communication device; the receiving module 2702 is configured to receive the first DRX configuration information from the second communication device; and the matching module 2703 is configured to determine The first DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information.
  • the first communication device is a TX UE
  • the second communication device is a RX UE
  • the third communication device is a network device to which the TX UE belongs; where the first resource configuration information can be used to indicate the base station in mode1
  • the resources configured for the TX UE can also be used to indicate the resource pool corresponding to the TX UE in mode2.
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a TX UE
  • the third communication device is a network device to which the RX UE belongs; where the first DRX configuration information is used for the RX UE and the TX UE For the first side link between the two, the first resource configuration information is used to indicate the receiving resource corresponding to the RX UE in mode2, and the receiving resource is used for the first side link.
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the third communication device is a TX UE
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the RX UE belongs; where the first resource configuration information includes instructions for instructing the RX UE to perform Perceived resource configuration information.
  • the first communication device may be an auxiliary user equipment
  • the second communication device may be a network device to which the auxiliary user equipment belongs
  • the third communication device may be an assisted user equipment; wherein, the first resource configuration information includes instructions for indicating the second A resource configuration information perceived by a communication device.
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a TX UE
  • the third communication device is a network device to which the RX UE belongs; where the first DRX configuration resource is used for the RX UE and the TX UE
  • the first side link between the RX UE and other RX UEs, and the first resource configuration information is used to indicate that the RX UE is on the second side link between the TX UE and other RX UEs.
  • the upper sending side link data can also be understood as the first resource configuration information used by the RX UE (as a TX UE) to send side link data to other UEs.
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the RX UE belongs
  • the third communication device is a TX UE; wherein the first DRX configuration resource is used for the RX UE and the TX UE
  • the first resource configuration information is used to indicate one or more resource sets corresponding to the RX UE.
  • the first communication device may be an assisted user equipment
  • the second communication device may be a network device to which the assisted user equipment belongs
  • the third communication device may be an auxiliary user equipment; wherein, the first DRX configuration resource is used for RX UE For the first side link with the TX UE, the first resource configuration information is used to indicate one or more resource sets corresponding to the RX UE.
  • the sending module 2701 is specifically configured to send mode switching request information to the third communication device, and the mode switching request information is used to request the third communication device to change the resource allocation mode of the first communication device from the first mode. Switch to the second mode; or, send resource configuration request information to the third communication device.
  • the resource configuration request information includes at least one of the following: the reason for the request indicating that the DRX configuration information does not match the resource configuration information, the first DRX configuration information, the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, the desired resource configuration information, or The amount of resource adjustment.
  • the sending module 2701 is specifically configured to send DRX configuration failure information to the second communication device.
  • the DRX configuration failure information includes at least one of the following: the third information used to indicate the failure of the DRX configuration, the identification information corresponding to the DRX configuration information, the configuration failure type used to indicate that the DRX configuration information does not match the resource configuration information, and it is not allowed.
  • the second communication device configures the first communication device with the effective duration of DRX, the first resource configuration information, the desired DRX configuration information, the DRX adjustment amount, and the corresponding identification information.
  • the receiving module 2702 is also used to receive DRX configuration failure information sent by the third communication device; the sending module 2701 is also used to send DRX configuration failure information to the second communication device.
  • the above-mentioned apparatus 2700 further includes a timer, which is used to start after the sending module 2701 sends resource configuration request information to the third communication device; the sending module 2701 is also used when the timer expires. And when the receiving module 2702 does not receive the resource configuration information sent by the third communication device, it sends DRX configuration failure information to the second communication device.
  • a timer which is used to start after the sending module 2701 sends resource configuration request information to the third communication device; the sending module 2701 is also used when the timer expires.
  • the receiving module 2702 does not receive the resource configuration information sent by the third communication device, it sends DRX configuration failure information to the second communication device.
  • the DRX configuration failure information is also used to trigger the second communication device to send fourth information to the network device to which the second communication device belongs, and the fourth information is used to indicate that the DRX configuration corresponding to the first side link fails .
  • the fourth information may be the aforementioned DRX configuration failure information, that is, the RX UE forwards the DRX configuration failure information to the base station to which it belongs, or the fourth information may also include indication information generated by the RX UE based on the DRX configuration failure information, to Indicates that the DRX configuration corresponding to the link on the first side failed.
  • the aforementioned identification information may include at least one of the following: target identification, source identification, side link connection identification, source and target identification pair, side link link identification, logical channel identification, resource pool identification, side link service identification, media Access control layer protocol data unit MAC PDU identification, transmission block TB identification.
  • the sending module 2701 is further configured to send resource configuration request information to the third communication device, and send DRX configuration failure information to the second communication device.
  • the first DRX configuration information is the current DRX configuration information of the first communication device; the receiving module 2702 is further configured to receive first resource configuration information from the third communication device; and the matching module 2703 is configured to It is determined that the first DRX configuration information does not match the first resource configuration information.
  • the first communication device is a TX UE
  • the second communication device is a RX UE
  • the third communication device is a network device to which the TX UE belongs; where the first resource configuration information can be used to indicate the base station in mode1
  • the resources configured for the TX UE can also be used to indicate the resource pool corresponding to the TX UE in mode2.
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the RX UE belongs
  • the third communication device is a RX UE.
  • the first resource configuration information is used to indicate the receiving resource corresponding to the TX UE in mode2.
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a network device of the RX UE
  • the third communication device is a TX UE
  • the first resource configuration information includes information used to instruct the RX UE to sense Resource configuration information.
  • the first communication device may be an assisted user equipment
  • the second communication device may be a network device to which the assisted user equipment belongs
  • the third communication device may be an auxiliary user equipment; wherein, the first resource configuration information includes instructions for indicating Resource configuration information perceived by the first communication device.
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a TX UE
  • the third communication device is a network device to which the RX UE belongs; wherein the first resource configuration information is used for the RX UE to communicate with other
  • the side link data sent on the second side link between UEs can also be understood as the first resource configuration information used for the RX UE (as a TX UE) to send side link data to other UEs.
  • the first communication device is a RX UE
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the RX UE belongs
  • the third communication device is a TX UE; wherein, the first resource configuration information is used to indicate the corresponding RX UE One or more resource collections.
  • the first communication device is an assisted user equipment
  • the second communication device is a network device to which the assisted user equipment belongs
  • the third communication device is an auxiliary user equipment.
  • the sending module 2701 is also used to send mode switching request information to the third communication device.
  • the mode switching request information is used to request the third communication device to change the resource allocation mode of the first communication device from the first mode. Switch to the second mode and configure resources for the first communication device according to the second mode; or send resource configuration failure information to the third communication device, where the resource configuration failure information includes at least one of the following:
  • the fifth information is used to indicate the configuration failure type that the resource configuration information does not match the DRX configuration information, the first DRX configuration information, the identification information corresponding to the first DRX configuration information, the expected resource configuration information or the resource adjustment amount.
  • the sending module 2701 is further configured to send DRX configuration request information to the third communication device.
  • the DRX configuration request information includes at least one of the following: a request reason used to indicate a mismatch between the DRX configuration information and the resource configuration information, the first resource configuration information, the desired DRX configuration or the DRX adjustment amount.
  • the sending module 2701 is also used for the first communication device to send resource configuration failure information to the second communication device, and to send DRX configuration request information to the third communication device.
  • the processor 1301 in the first communication device executes the executable code or application program stored in the memory 1302, it can execute the side of the first communication device in the above embodiment.
  • the specific execution process of the method steps please refer to the above-mentioned embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the above-mentioned memory 1302 stores computer-executable instructions for realizing the functions of the above-mentioned sending module, receiving module, and matching module.
  • the functions/implementation processes of the sending module, the receiving module, and the matching module described above can be implemented by the processor 1301 in FIG. 13 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1302. Refer to the specific implementation process and function The above-mentioned related embodiments.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores instructions. When the instructions run on a computer, they are used to perform the communication described in one or more embodiments. method.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program or computer program product.
  • the computer program or computer program product When executed on a computer, the computer realizes the communication method described in one or more embodiments.
  • the computer-readable medium may include a computer-readable storage medium, which corresponds to a tangible medium, such as a data storage medium, or a communication medium that includes any medium that facilitates the transfer of a computer program from one place to another (for example, according to a communication protocol) .
  • a computer-readable medium may generally correspond to (1) a non-transitory tangible computer-readable storage medium, or (2) a communication medium, such as a signal or carrier wave.
  • Data storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by one or more computers or one or more processors to retrieve instructions, codes, and/or data structures for implementing the techniques described in this application.
  • the computer program product may include a computer-readable medium.
  • such computer-readable storage media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage devices, magnetic disk storage devices or other magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or structures that can be used to store instructions or data Any other media that can be accessed by the computer in the form of desired program code. And, any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium.
  • any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium.
  • coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave to transmit instructions from a website, server, or other remote source
  • coaxial cable Wire, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL, or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave are included in the definition of media.
  • the computer-readable storage media and data storage media do not include connections, carrier waves, signals, or other temporary media, but are actually directed to non-transitory tangible storage media.
  • magnetic disks and optical disks include compact disks (CDs), laser disks, optical disks, digital versatile disks (DVD) and Blu-ray disks, where disks usually reproduce data magnetically, while optical disks use lasers to reproduce data optically data. Combinations of the above should also be included in the scope of computer-readable media.
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA field programmable logic arrays
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASSIC application-specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA field programmable logic arrays
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA field programmable logic arrays
  • processor may refer to any of the foregoing structure or any other structure suitable for implementing the techniques described herein.
  • the functions described by the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and steps described herein may be provided in dedicated hardware and/or software modules configured for encoding and decoding, or combined Into the combined codec.
  • the technology may be fully implemented in one or more circuits or logic elements.
  • the technology of this application can be implemented in a variety of devices or devices, including wireless handsets, integrated circuits (ICs), or a set of ICs (for example, chipsets).
  • ICs integrated circuits
  • a set of ICs for example, chipsets.
  • Various components, modules, or units are described in this application to emphasize the functional aspects of the device for implementing the disclosed technology, but they do not necessarily need to be implemented by different hardware units.
  • various units can be combined with appropriate software and/or firmware in the codec hardware unit, or by interoperating hardware units (including one or more processors as described above). supply.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供一种通信方法及装置。该方法可以包括：第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源和第一业务；第一通信设备从第一候选资源中确定第一资源；第一资源与第一激活期在时域上存在交集，第一激活期是根据第一业务对应的DRX激活期确定的。在本申请中，第一通信设备选择与第一业务对应的DRX激活期存在交集的资源作为预留资源，并使用该预留资源进行侧链路传输，如此能够保证第一通信设备可以在激活期内接收到来自第二通信设备(如TX UE)的传输，节约RX UE的功耗，并保证第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧链路传输。

Description

一种通信方法及装置
本申请要求于2020年5月20日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010432864.6、申请名称为“一种通信方法、装置及设备”，以及于2020年10月22日提交中国专利局、申请号为202011141177.5、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，特别涉及一种通信方法及装置。
背景技术
新无线(new radio，NR)系统是目前主流的无线通信技术，其针对车联网(vehicle to everthing，V2X)业务特性及新的业务传输需求，目标是支持更低延迟，更高可靠性的V2X通信。但是，在侧链路(sidelink)中，接收终端设备(RX UE)会一直监听侧链路控制信息(sidelink control information，SCI)，查看是否有来自于发送终端设备(TX UE)的信息。
然而，UE自主选择资源的场景下，RX UE并不是一直在和TX UE进行有效信息的交互。那么，在收发UE之间没有数据交互的时候，如果RX UE还持续监听SCI，会增加RX UE的功耗。
发明内容
本申请提供了一种通信方法及装置，以节约RX UE的功耗。
第一方面，本申请提供一种通信方法，可以应用于一通信系统，该通信系统可以应用于侧链路通信系统，如车联网系统。该方法可以包括：第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源和第一业务；第一通信设备从第一候选资源中确定第一资源；第一资源与第一激活期在时域上存在交集，第一激活期是根据第一业务对应的DRX激活期确定的。
在本申请中，第一通信设备选择与第一业务对应的DRX激活期存在交集的资源作为预留资源，并使用该预留资源进行侧链路传输，如此能够保证第一通信设备可以在激活期内接收到来自第二通信设备(如TX UE)的传输，节约RX UE的功耗，并保证第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧链路传输。
基于第一方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备从第一候选资源中确定第一资源，包括：第一通信设备将第一候选资源中在时域上与第一激活期存在交集的资源确定为第二候选资源；第一通信设备从第二候选资源中确定第一资源。
基于第一方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中在时域上与第一激活期存在交集的资源确定为第二候选资源，包括：第一通信设备将第一候 选资源中在时域上包含于第一激活期的资源确定为第二候选资源。
基于第一方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，在多个destination ID的场景下，第一通信设备使用第一资源开始侧链路传输之前，还可从第一业务中选择第二业务，此时，第一通信设备可以从上述多个destination ID中选择对应的DRX激活期与第一资源在时域上存在交集的destination ID。
基于第一方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，上述方法还可以包括：第一通信设备确定第一激活期；第一通信设备在第一激活期内监听SCI；这里，SCI用于指示其他UE用于侧链路传输的资源。
在本申请中，第一通信设备的MAC层在确定第一激活期之后，向第一通信设备的物理层指示第一激活期，物理层在第一激活期内监听其他UE发送的SCI，进而物理层在第一激活期内进行测量。
基于第一方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备确定至少一个DRX配置中DRX激活期在时域上的并集，也就是第一激活期，这里，至少一个DRX配置可以为第一通信设备能够确定的部分或者全部DRX配置。可以理解的，至少一个DRX配置可以包括第一业务的DRX配置。
进一步地，第一通信设备在第一激活期内进行测量。
在本申请中，上述测量可以包括测量PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP；或者，测量S-RSSI。其中PSCCH-RSRP是对PSCCH关联的DMRS测量获得的，PSSCH-RSRP是对PSSCH关联的DMRS测量获得的。
可以理解的，第一通信设备在第一激活期内监听其他UE发送的SCI，那么，SCI所指示的资源是位于第一激活期内的，那么，第一通信设备对SCI指示的资源进行测量，也可以认为是在第一激活期内进行测量。
基于第一方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，第一通信设备还可以进行资源排除，在选择窗内进行资源排除时，第一通信设备的MAC层先向物理层指示第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集和/或第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集，也就是第一激活期，然后，物理层从第二资源中排除资源，确定与上述并集存在交集的资源作为第一候选资源，可以理解的，第一候选资源需要满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；在时域上与第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集。
在本申请中，第二资源可以为物理层通过sensing确定的资源在选择窗中对应的资源，还可以为物理层从通过sensing确定的资源中进行资源排除后的资源在选择窗中对应的资源。
在一些可选的实施方式中，物理层还可以进一步从上述第一候选资源中排除资源。
第二方面，本申请提供一种通信方法，可以应用于一通信系统，该通信系统可以应用于侧链路通信系统，如车联网系统。该方法可以包括：在第一业务包括多个destination ID的场景下，第一通信设备使用第一资源开始侧链路传输之前，还可从第一业务中选择第二业务，此时，第一通信设备可以从上述多个destination ID中选择对应的DRX激活期与第一资源在时域上存在交集的destination ID。
第三方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，可以应用于一通信系统，该通信系统可以应用于侧链路通信系统，如车联网系统。该方法可以包括：第一通信设备确定第二激活期；第一通信设备在第二激活期内监听SCI；
这里，SCI用于指示其他UE用于侧链路传输的资源。
在本申请中，第一通信设备的MAC层在确定第二激活期之后，向第一通信设备的物理层指示第二激活期，物理层在第二激活期内监听其他UE发送的SCI，进而物理层在第二激活期内进行测量。
基于第三方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备确定至少一个DRX配置中DRX激活期在时域上的并集，也就是第二激活期，这里，至少一个DRX配置可以为第一通信设备能够确定的部分或者全部DRX配置。可以理解的，至少一个DRX配置可以包括第一业务的DRX配置。
进一步地，第一通信设备在第二激活期内进行sensing，解调其他UE的SCI，来获知其他UE的资源占用情况。
在本申请中，第一通信设备选择与第一业务对应的DRX激活期存在交集(即第二激活期)的资源作为预留资源，并使用该预留资源进行侧链路传输，如此能够保证第一通信设备可以在激活期内接收到来自第二通信设备(如TX UE)的传输，节约RX UE的功耗，并保证第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧链路传输。
基于第三方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备可以根据SCI，在第二激活期内进行测量，也就是对SCI指示的资源进行测量。
在本申请中，上述“测量”可以包括测量PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP；或者，测量S-RSSI。其中PSCCH-RSRP是对PSCCH关联的DMRS测量确定的，PSSCH-RSRP是对PSSCH关联的DMRS测量确定的。
可以理解的，第一通信设备在第二激活期内监听SCI，那么，SCI所指示的资源是位于第二激活期内的，那么，第一通信设备对SCI指示的资源进行测量，也可以认为是在第二激活期内进行测量。
基于第三方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，第一通信设备还可以确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源和第一业务；第一通信设备从第一候选资源中确定第一资源。
基于第三方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备从第一候选资源中确定第一资源，包括：第一通信设备将第一候选资源中在时域上与第二激活期存在交集的资源确定为第二候选资源；第一通信设备从第二候选资源中确定第一资源。
基于第三方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中在时域上与第二激活期存在交集的资源确定为第二候选资源，包括：第一通信设备将第一候选资源中在时域上包含于第二激活期的资源确定为第二候选资源。
基于第三方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，在多个destination ID的场景下，第一通信设备使用第一资源开始侧链路传输之前，还可以对第一业务，也就是destination ID进行选择，此时，第一通信设备可以从上述多个destination ID中选择对应的DRX激活期与第一资源在时域上存在交集的destination ID(用于标识第二业务)，也就是说最后选择的destination ID对应的激活期与 预留资源在时域上存在交集。
基于第三方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，第一通信设备还可以进行资源排除，在选择窗内进行资源排除时，第一通信设备的MAC层先向物理层指示第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集和/或第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集，也就是第二激活期，然后，物理层从第二资源中进行资源排除，确定与上述并集存在交集的资源作为第三候选资源，也就是说，第三候选资源需要满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；在时域上与第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集。可以理解的，第三候选资源可以作为上述第一候选资源，当然，物理层也可以进一步地从第三候选资源中执行如S803所述方法来确定第一候选资源，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在本申请中，第二资源可以为物理层通过sensing确定的资源在选择窗中对应的资源，还可以为物理层从通过sensing确定的资源中进行资源排除后的资源在选择窗中对应的资源。
第四方面，本申请提供一种通信方法，可以应用于一通信系统，该通信系统可以应用于侧链路通信系统，如车联网系统。该方法可以包括：第一通信设备确定第四资源；第一通信设备从第四资源中确定出第三候选资源；这里，第三候选资源需要满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；在时域上与第一业务中当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集。
基于第四方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备在选择窗内进行资源排除时，第一通信设备的MAC层先向物理层指示第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集和/或第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集，也就是第一激活期，然后，物理层从第四资源中进行资源排除，确定与上述并集存在交集的资源作为第三候选资源，也就是说，第三候选资源需要满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；在时域上与第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集。
在本申请中，物理层也可以进一步地从第三候选资源中排除资源，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在本申请中，第四资源可以为在选择窗的资源，还可以为选择窗中的资源进行资源排除后剩下的资源。
在本申请中，第一通信设备选择与第一业务对应的DRX激活期存在交集的资源作为预留资源，并使用该预留资源进行侧链路传输，如此能够保证第一通信设备可以在激活期内接收到来自第二通信设备(如TX UE)的传输，节约RX UE的功耗，并保证第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧链路传输。
基于第四方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，上述方法还包括：第一通信设备确定第一激活期；第一通信设备在第一激活期内监听SCI。
这里，SCI用于指示其他UE用于侧链路传输的资源。
在本申请中，第一通信设备的MAC层在确定第二激活期之后，向第一通信设备 的物理层指示第二激活期，物理层在第二激活期内监听其他UE发送的SCI，进而物理层在第一激活期内进行测量。
基于第四方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备确定至少一个DRX配置中DRX激活期在时域上的并集，也就是第一激活期，这里，至少一个DRX配置可以为第一通信设备能够确定的部分或者全部DRX配置。可以理解的，至少一个DRX配置可以包括第一业务的DRX配置。
基于第四方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，第一通信设备还可以确定用于侧链路传输的第三候选资源和第一业务；第一通信设备从第三候选资源中确定第五资源。
基于第四方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备从第三候选资源中确定第一资源，包括：第一通信设备将第三候选资源中在时域上与第一激活期存在交集的资源确定为第四候选资源；第一通信设备从第四候选资源中确定第一资源。
基于第四方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备将第三候选资源中在时域上与第一激活期存在交集的资源确定为第四候选资源，包括：第一通信设备将第三候选资源中在时域上包含于第一激活期的资源确定为第四候选资源。
基于第四方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，在多个destination ID的场景下，第一通信设备在使用第五资源开始侧链路传输之前，还可以对第一业务，也就是通信目标进行选择，此时，第一通信设备可以从多个destination ID中选择对应的DRX激活期与第五资源在时域上存在交集的destination ID，选中的destination ID所标识的通信目标即为选择的第二业务，也就是说，最后选择的destination ID对应的DRX激活期与预留资源在时域上存在交集。
第五方面，本申请提供一种通信方法，可以应用于一通信系统，该通信系统可以应用于侧链路通信系统，如车联网系统。该方法可以包括：第一通信设备确定第二激活期，第二激活期为至少一个非连续接收DRX配置中DRX激活期在时域上的并集；第一通信设备在第二激活期内监听侧链路控制信息SCI，SCI用于指示其他通信设备用于侧链路传输的资源；
进一步地，第一通信设备根据SCI，在第二激活期内进行测量。
基于第五方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，至少一个DRX配置包括第一业务的DRX配置。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，可以应用于一通信系统，该通信系统可以应用于侧链路通信系统，如车联网系统。该方法可以包括：第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第四资源；第一通信设备从第四资源中确定出第三候选资源，第三候选资源满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的非连续接收DRX激活期的并集存在交集，第一业务包括当前业务和/或历史业务；在时域上与当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；其中，第三候选资源用于确定用于侧链路传输的第五资源。
基于第六方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一业务对应的DRX激活期包括以下至少一个：通信目标对应的DRX激活期、侧链路连接对应的DRX激活期、逻辑信道对应 的DRX激活期、资源池对应的DRX激活期、侧链路业务对应的DRX激活期、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU对应的DRX激活期、传输块TB对应的DRX激活期。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，可以应用于一通信系统，该通信系统可以应用于侧链路通信系统，如车联网系统。该方法可以包括：第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第三资源；若第三资源与第一通信设备的第四业务对应的非连续接收DRX激活期不存在交集，则第一通信设备触发资源重选。
基于第七方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第三资源与第四业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，包括：第三资源与第四业务对应的多个DRX激活期的并集不存在交集；或者，第三资源与第一业务对应的多个DRX激活期中的至少一个DRX激活期不存在交集；或者，所述第三资源与所述第四业务对应的多个DRX激活期中满足预设数量的DRX激活期不存在交集。
基于第七方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一业务对应的DRX激活期包括以下至少一个：通信目标对应的DRX激活期、侧链路连接对应的DRX激活期、源和目标对对应的DRX激活期、侧链路链接对应的DRX激活期、逻辑信道对应的DRX激活期、资源池对应的DRX激活期、侧链路业务对应的DRX激活期、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU对应的DRX激活期、传输块TB对应的DRX激活期。
基于第七方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备还可以为第三资源配置周期，那么，第一通信设备可以将第四业务对应的DRX配置中满足第二条件的DRX周期(即DRX cycle)配置为第三资源对应的周期。
这里，第二条件可以包括：第四业务对应的DRX配置中DRX周期的最小值、第一业务对应的DRX配置中DRX周期小于预设门限、第四业务对应的DRX配置中DRX周期小于20％等，第二条件还可以为其他条件，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在本申请实施例中，通过将第一资源的周期选取为第四业务对应的所有DRX配置的周期的最小值，以使得第一通信设备醒来监听SCI的周期与第四业务发送的周期相匹配，从而提升了侧链路资源被有效利用的概率。
在本申请中，在第一至六方面及其任一可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备在对选定的第三资源进评估时，均可以执行第七方面及其任一可能的实施方式所述的方法。第一通信设备可以对第三资源(即第一通信设备选择的预留资源)进行评估，若第一通信设备确定第三资源与第一通信设备的第四业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，第一通信设备触发资源重选，以重新选择与第一业务的DRX激活期存在交集的资源。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，可以应用于一通信系统，该通信系统可以应用于侧链路通信系统，如车联网系统。该方法可以包括：第一通信设备可以为资源配置周期，那么，第一通信设备可以将第一通信设备的第五业务对应的DRX配置中满足第二条件的DRX周期(即DRX cycle)配置为该资源对应的周期。
这里，第二条件可以包括：第五业务对应的DRX配置中DRX周期的最小值、第一业务对应的DRX配置中DRX周期小于预设门限、第一业务对应的DRX配置中DRX周期小于20％等，第二条件还可以为其他条件，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在本申请中，第一通信设备通过将选取资源的周期选取为第五业务对应的所有DRX配置的周期的最小值，以使得第一通信设备醒来监听SCI的周期与第五业务发送的周期相 匹配，从而提升了侧链路资源被有效利用的概率。
在本申请中，在第一至七方面及其任一可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备在为资源配置周期时，均可以执行第八方面及其任一可能的实施方式所述的方法。
第九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，可以应用于一通信系统，该通信系统可以应用于侧链路通信系统，如车联网系统。该方法可以包括：第一通信设备确定第一资源池或第一资源池中的资源满足第三条件；第一通信设备进行DRX配置，和/或第一通信设备指示第二通信设备进行DRX配置，以使得第一通信设备选择能够用于侧链路传输的资源池。
这里，第一资源池是第一通信设备当前进行资源选择的资源池；
基于第九方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第三条件包括：当前资源池的信道拥塞率(channel busy ratio，CBR)满足第四条件，如第四条件可以为CBR大于预设值(可以经验值)或者CBR在预设范围内、第一通信设备触发资源池重选和/或丢包率满足第五条件，如第五条件可以为丢包率大于预设值(可以经验值)，或者丢包率在预设范围内等。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第三条件还可以包括以下一个条件或者多个条件的组合：CBR满足第四条件达到第一阈值、第一通信设备触发资源池重选的次数达到第二阈值、第二通信设备的丢包率满足第五条件的次数达到第三阈值。其中，第一阈值、第二阈值以及第三阈值可以为经验值。
本申请中，第一通信设备确定第一资源池或第一资源池中的资源满足第三条件之后，进行DRX配置，以使得第一通信设备选择能够用于侧链路传输的资源池。
需要说明的是，这里所说的“DRX配置”可以理解为根据预留资源进行DRX配置，例如，根据预留资源进行DRX重配，使得预留资源在时域上与重配后的DRX激活期存在交集；或者，根据预留资源进行DRX初配，使得预留资源在时域上与配置的DRX激活期存在交集。
在本申请中，第一通信设备确定第一资源池或第一资源池中的资源满足第三条件之后，指示第二通信设备选择能够用于侧链路传输的资源池。
基于第九方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一指示消息，第一指示消息用于向第二通信设备通知第一通信设备的当前资源池或当前资源池中的资源满足第三条件；或者，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第二指示消息，第二指示消息用于指示第二通信设备进行DRX配置；和/或，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第三指示消息，第三指示消息用于指示DRX配置信息。
基于第九方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，如果第一通信设备为TX UE，第一通信设备还可以接收来自第二通信设备(RX UE)的第四指示消息，第四指示消息用于指示丢包率或者丢包率满足第五条件，例如，第五条件可以为丢包率大于预设值(可以为经验值)，或者丢包率在预设范围内等。
第十方面，本申请提供一种通信方法，可以应用于一通信系统，该通信系统可以应用于侧链路通信系统，如车联网系统。该方法可以包括：若第一非连续接收DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配，则第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一信息，和/或向第三通信设备发送第二信息；其中，第一DRX配置信息用于第一通信设备对应 的第一侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于第一通信设备对应的第二侧链路，第一信息用于指示第二通信设备为第一侧链路进行DRX配置，第二信息用于指示第三通信设备为第二侧链路进行资源配置。
在一些可能的实现方式中，第一侧链路可以为一条或者多条侧链路，第二侧链路也可以为一条或者多条侧链路。需要注意的是，当第一侧链路为一条侧链路时，第二侧链路与第一侧链路可以为同一侧链路，或者第二侧链路与第一侧链路为不同侧链路，当第一侧链路为多条侧链路时，第二侧链路可以为第一侧链路中的一条或者多条，也就是说，第二侧链路为第一侧链路中的部分侧链路或者全部侧链路。
在一些可能的实现方式中，由于DRX配置信息和资源配置信息是由不同的主体进行配置的，那么，第一DRX配置信息所指示的DRX激活时段与第一资源配置信息所指示的时间区域可能会在一个或者多个时间段内存在冲突，此时，可以称为第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配。
可选的，上述“一个时间段”可以指已发生的时域区间对应的时隙，也可以指未发生的时域区间对应的时隙。
进一步地，上述第一DRX配置信息所指示的DRX激活时段与第一资源配置信息所指示的时域区间在一个时间段内存在冲突，包括：n个DRX激活时段与时域区间重叠的时隙数小于预设阈值，n为正整数。例如，n个DRX激活时段与时域区间重叠的时隙数小于预设阈值，包括：重叠时隙数除以n倍的DRX激活期的时隙数小于预设阈值。
在本申请中，当第一通信设备判断SL资源与SL DRX不匹配时，向第二通信设备发送第一信息和/或向第三通信设备发送第二信息第二通信设备，以使得第二通信设备和/或第三通信设备配置的SL资源与SL DRX相匹配。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一资源配置信息为第一通信设备当前的资源配置信息；上述方法还包括：第一通信设备接收来自第二通信设备的第一DRX配置信息；第一通信设备确定第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为发送终端设备，第二通信设备为接收终端设备，第三通信设备为发送终端设备所属的网络设备；其中，第一资源配置信息可以用于指示mode1中基站为发送终端设备配置的资源，也可以用于指示mode2中发送终端设备对应的资源池。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为接收终端设备，第二通信设备为发送终端设备，第三通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备；其中，第一资源配置信息用于指示mode2中接收终端设备对应的接收资源，该接收资源用于第一侧链路。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为接收终端设备，第三通信设备为发送终端设备，第二通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备；其中，第一资源配置信息包括用于指示接收终端设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
进一步地，第一通信设备可以为辅助用户设备，第二通信设备可以为辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备可以为被辅助用户设备；其中，第一资源配置信息包括用于指示第一通信设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为接收终端设备，第二通信设备为发送终端设备，第三通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备；第一资源配置信息用于接收终端设备作为发送终端设备与其他终端设备(即第四通信设备)之间的第二侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于指示接收终端设备在第二侧链路上发送侧链路数据，也可以理解为，第一资源配置信息用于指示接收终端设备向其他终端设备发送侧链路数据。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为接收终端设备，第二通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备为发送终端设备；其中，第一资源配置信息用于指示接收终端设备对应的一个或者多个资源集合。
进一步地，第一通信设备可以为被辅助用户设备，第二通信设备可以为被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备可以为辅助用户设备；其中，第一资源配置信息用于指示被辅助用户设备对应的一个或者多个资源集合。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送第二信息，包括：第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送模式切换请求信息，模式切换请求信息用于请求第三通信设备将第一通信设备的资源分配模式由第一模式切换为第二模式；或，第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送资源配置请求信息；其中，资源配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一DRX配置信息、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息或资源调整量。
可选的，上述第一通信设备的资源分配模式包括mode1和mode2。第一模式为mode1，则第二模式为mode2；或者，第一模式为mode2，第二资源为mode1。
其中，在mode1下，基站通过调度为发送终端设备分配SL传输资源；在mode2下，终端设备根据需要自主从预配置或者基站配置的资源池中选择传输资源，不需要基站进行调度。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一信息，可以包括：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息。
示例性地，DRX配置失败信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置失败的第三信息、DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、不允许第二通信设备为第一通信设备配置DRX的有效时长、第一资源配置信息、期望的DRX配置信息、DRX调整量以及对应的标识信息。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息，包括：第一通信设备接收第三通信设备发送的DRX配置失败信息；第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息；或，第一通信设备在向第三通信设备发送资源配置请求信息后启动定时器；当定时器超时且第一通信设备未收到第三通信设备发送的资源配置信息时，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，DRX配置失败信息还用于触发第二通信设备向第二通信设备所属的网络设备发送第四信息，第四信息用于指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败。
可以理解的，第四信息可以为上述DRX配置失败信息，即接收终端设备向自身所属的基站转发DRX配置失败信息，或者，第四信息还可以包括接收终端设备基于DRX配置失败信息生成的指示信息，以指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败。
上述标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU标识、传输块TB标识。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一信息，和向第三通信设备发送第二信息，包括：第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送资源配置请求信息，并向第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一DRX配置信息为第一通信设备当前的DRX配置信息；上述方法还包括：第一通信设备接收来自第三通信设备的第一资源配置信息；第一通信设备确定第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为发送终端设备，第二通信设备为接收终端设备，第三通信设备为发送终端设备所属的网络设备；其中，第一资源配置信息可以用于指示mode1中基站为发送终端设备配置的资源，也可以用于指示mode2中发送终端设备对应的资源池。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为接收终端设备，第二通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备为接收终端设备。其中，第一资源配置信息用于指示mode2中发送终端设备对应的接收资源。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为接收终端设备，第二通信设备为接收终端设备的网络设备，第三通信设备为发送终端设备；其中，第一资源配置信息包括用于指示接收终端设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
进一步地，第一通信设备可以为被辅助用户设备，第二通信设备可以为被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备可以为辅助用户设备；其中，第一资源配置信息包括用于指示第一通信设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为接收终端设备，第二通信设备为发送终端设备，第三通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备；其中，第一资源配置信息用于接收终端设备在与其他终端设备(即第四通信设备)之间的第二侧链路上发送侧链路数据，也可以理解的，第一资源配置信息用于接收终端设备向其他终端设备发送侧链路数据。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为接收终端设备，第二通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备为发送终端设备；其中，第一资源配置信息用于指示接收终端设备对应的一个或者多个资源集合。
进一步地，第一通信设备为被辅助用户设备，第二通信设备为被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备为辅助用户设备。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送第二信息，包括：第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送模式切换请求信息，模式切换请求信息用于请求第三通信设备将第一通信设备的资源分配模式由第一模式切换为第二模式并按照第二模式为第一通信设备配置资源；或，第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送 资源配置失败信息，其中，资源配置失败信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示资源配置失败的第五信息，用于表示资源配置信息与DRX配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、第一DRX配置信息、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息或资源调整量。
可选的，上述第一通信设备的资源分配模式包括mode1和mode2。第一模式为mode1，则第二模式为mode2；或者，第一模式为mode2，第二资源为mode1。
其中，在mode1下，基站通过调度为发送终端设备分配SL传输资源；在mode2下，终端设备根据需要自主从预配置或者基站配置的资源池中选择传输资源，不需要基站进行调度。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一信息，包括：第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送DRX配置请求信息；其中，DRX配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一资源配置信息、期望的DRX配置或DRX调整量。
基于第十方面，在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一信息，和向第三通信设备发送第二信息，包括：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送资源配置失败信息，并向第三通信设备发送DRX配置请求信息。
第十一方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，装置用于执行如第一至十方面及其任一可能的实施方式所述的通信方法。
第十二方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，包括：处理器和存储器；处理器与存储器耦合，处理器被配置为读取并执行存储器中的指令，以实现如第一至十方面及其任一可能的实施方式所述的通信方法。
第十三方面，本申请提供一种通信系统，包括：如第十二方面及其任一可能的实施方式中所述的通信装置。
第十四方面，本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行如第一至十方面及其任一可能的实施方式所述的通信方法。
应当理解的是，本申请的第九至十二方面与本申请的第一方面至第八方面的技术方案一致，各方面及对应的可行实施方式所取得的有益效果相似，不再赘述。
附图说明
下面将对本申请实施例或背景技术中所需要使用的附图进行说明。
图1为本申请实施例中的通信系统的一种架构示意图；
图2为本申请实施例中的通信系统的另一种架构示意图；
图3为本申请实施例中的在UE自主选择资源场景下的通信方法的流程示意图；
图4为本申请实施例中的资源与DRX激活期的第一种示意图；
图5为本申请实施例中的资源与DRX激活期的第二种示意图；
图6为本申请实施例中的资源与DRX激活期的第三种示意图；
图7为本申请实施例中的第一通信设备侧通信方法的第一流程示意图；
图8为本申请实施例中的第一通信设备侧通信方法的第二流程示意图；
图9为本申请实施例中的第一通信设备侧通信方法的第三流程示意图；
图10为本申请实施例中的资源与当前业务对应的DRX激活期的示意图；
图11为本申请实施例中的通信方法的流程示意图；
图12为本申请实施例中的通信装置的一种结构示意图；
图13为本申请实施例中的通信装置的另一种结构示意图；
图14为本申请实施例中的通信系统的又一种架构示意图；
图15为本申请实施例中的第一通信设备侧通信方法的第四流程示意图；
图16为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第一种场景示意图；
图17为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第二种场景示意图；
图18为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第三种场景示意图；
图19为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第四种场景示意图；
图20为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第五种场景示意图；
图21为本申请实施例中的第一通信设备侧通信方法的第五流程示意图；
图22为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第六种场景示意图；
图23为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第七种场景示意图；
图24为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第八种场景示意图；
图25为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第九种场景示意图；
图26为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第十种场景示意图；
图27为本申请实施例中的通信装置的又一种结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。以下描述中，参考形成本申请一部分并以说明之方式示出本申请实施例的具体方面或可使用本申请实施例的具体方面的附图。应理解，本申请实施例可在其它方面中使用，并可包括附图中未描绘的结构或逻辑变化。例如，应理解，结合所描述方法的揭示内容可以同样适用于用于执行所述方法的对应设备或系统，且反之亦然。例如，如果描述一个或多个具体方法步骤，则对应的设备可以包含如功能单元等一个或多个单元，来执行所描述的一个或多个方法步骤(例如，一个单元执行一个或多个步骤，或多个单元，其中每一个都执行多个步骤中的一个或多个)，即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个单元。另一方面，例如，如果基于如功能单元等一个或多个单元描述具体装置，则对应的方法可以包含一个步骤来执行一个或多个单元的功能性(例如，一个步骤执行一个或多个单元的功能性，或多个步骤，其中每一个执行多个单元中一个或多个单元的功能性)，即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个步骤。进一步，应理解的是，除非另外明确提出，本文中所描述的各示例性实施例和/或方面的特征可以相互组合。
新无线(new radio，NR)系统是目前主流的无线通信技术，其针对车联网(vehicle to everthing，V2X)业务特性及新的业务传输需求，目标是支持更低延迟，更高可靠性的V2X通信。但是，在侧链路(sidelink，SL)中，接收端用户设备(RX UE)会一直监听SCI，查看是否有来自及发送端用户设备的(TX UE)的信息。然而，在sidelink中，RX UE和TX UE之间不是一直有业务传输。那么，在收发UE之间没有数据交互的时候，如 果RX UE还持续监听SCI，会增加RX UE的功耗。
那么，为了解决侧链路中UE持续监听SCI所造成的功耗较高的问题，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，该通信方法可以应用于通信系统，该通信系统可以为侧链路通信系统，侧链路通信系统可以适应于车联网(vehicle to everything，V2X)、智能网联汽车及自动驾驶汽车等领域。上述通信系统中可以包括至少一个通信设备。在一种场景下，图1为本申请实施例中的通信系统的一种架构示意图，参见图1所示，该通信系统10中可以包括：网络设备11和终端设备12。在另一种场景下，图2为本申请实施例中的通信系统的另一种架构示意图，参见图2所示，该通信系统10还可以包括多个终端设备12。当然，在本申请实施例中，通信系统包含的网元的类型、数量，以及网元之间的连接关系不限于此。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备与网络设备通信的同时，还可以与其他终端设备通信。网络设备可以对终端设备之间通信的侧链路(sidelink)进行资源的配置、调度、协调等，以辅助终端设备之间直接进行通信。终端设备也可以自行对于其他终端设备之间通信的侧链路进行资源的配置、调度、协调等，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述网络设备可以是接入网侧用于支持终端接入无线通信系统的设备，例如，可以是5G接入技术通信系统中的下一代基站(next generation NodeB，gNB)、发送接收点(transmission reception point，TRP)、中继节点(relay node)、接入点(access point，AP)、路边装置(road site unit，RSU)等。
上述终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音或者数据连通性的设备，例如也可以称为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、移动台(mobile station)、用户单元(subscriber unit)、站台(STAtion)或者终端设备(terminal equipment，TE)等。通信设备可以为蜂窝电话(cellular phone)、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、无线调制解调器(modem)、手持V2P设备(handheld vehicle to perdestrian)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、无绳电话(cordless phone)、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)台或者平板电脑(pad)、中继节点、AP等。随着无线通信技术的发展，可以接入无线通信系统、可以与无线通信系统的网络侧进行通信，或者通过无线通信系统与其它设备进行通信的设备都可以是本申请实施例中的终端设备，譬如，智能交通中的终端、汽车或RSU、智能家居中的家用设备、智能电网中的电力抄表仪器、电压监测仪器、环境监测仪器、智能安全网络中的视频监控仪器、收款机等。通信设备可以是静态固定的，也可以是移动的。
进一步地，在侧链路传输场景中，上述通信设备(可以包括终端设备和/或网络设备)按照数据传输方向可以分为发送端设备和接收端设备。其中，发送端设备可以包括发送端网络设备、发送终端设备、发送端用户设备等；接收端设备可以包括接收端网络设备、接收终端设备、接收端用户设备等。
需要说明的是，上述发送端设备(或者发送端网络设备、发送终端设备、发送端用户设备等)以及接收端设备(或者接收端网络设备、接收终端设备、接收端用户设备等)是针对某一条侧链路连接(sidelink connection)而言的。例如，一个通信设备(或者网络设备、终端设备、用户设备等)对于侧链路连接A来说，可以为发送端设备(或者发送端网络设备、发送终端设备、发送端用户设备等)；而对于侧链路连接B来说，该通 信设备(或者网络设备、终端设备、用户设备等)可以为接收端设备(或者接收端网络设备、接收终端设备、接收端用户设备等)。
下面结合上述通信系统，对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行说明。
在NR SL中，网络设备，如基站为UE的SL通信配置资源池，一个资源池为一些时频资源的集合。UE在SL链路上进行通信的资源是从预配置或者基站侧配置的资源池中确定的。具体的，TX UE从网络设备获取在SL链路进行通信的传输资源有两种模式，分别是mode1和mode2。其中，上述预配置的资源可以是从核心网的网元获取的，也可以是预置在UE内的。
在mode1下，基站通过调度为TX UE分配SL传输资源。在此模式下，当TX UE有SL待传输数据时，通过Uu口向基站上报SL缓存状态报告(buffer status report，BSR)MAC CE，以告知基站当前TX UE在PC5口的待传输数据的数据量。基站可以为TX UE动态分配传输资源。
在mode2下，UE根据需要自主从预配置或者基站配置的资源池中选择传输资源，不需要基站进行调度。UE确定的SL资源是基站配置的(如通过RRC信令配置或者系统信息块(system information block，SIB)配置)，或者预配置的。这里所说的预配置可以是从核心网的网元获取，也可以是预置在UE内的。
在UE自主选择资源(即mode2)场景下，TX UE进行一次资源选择，会为一个业务，如一个通信目标(用destination ID来指示，如destination L1 ID或destination L2 ID)、一个侧链路连接(如无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)连接)、一个SL链路、一个源和目标对(如{source L2/L1 ID，destination L2/L1 ID})、一个侧链路业务、一个逻辑信道、一个资源池、一个传输块(transform block，TB)、一个或者多个媒介访问控制层分组数据单元(medium access control packet data unit，MAC PDU)等选择至少一个资源(通常可以包括用于一次传输机会的1个到3个资源及其对应的周期性资源)，至少一个资源用于新传或者重传该业务，这至少一个资源也可以称为预留资源(reserved resources)。
图3为本申请实施例中的在UE自主选择资源场景下的通信方法的流程示意图，参见图3所示，该方法可以包括：
S301：TX UE进行感知(sensing)；
TX UE持续监听其他UE发送的SCI，并按照SCI的指示进行测量，获得测量结果。这里，TX UE监听到其他UE的SCI后，对SCI进行解调，解调的SCI至少可以反映出sidelink上资源的使用情况。
在本申请实施例中，上述“测量”可以包括基于sidelink解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)的sidelink RSRP的测量，例如，测量PSCCH的参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power，RSRP)(即PSCCH-RSRP)或者PSSCH-RSRP；或者，还可以测量侧链路接收信号强度指示符(sidelink received signal strength indicator，S-RSSI)等。其中PSCCH-RSRP是对PSCCH关联的DMRS测量确定的，PSSCH-RSRP是对PSSCH关联的DMRS测量确定的。当然，UE还可以对SCI指示的资源的其他参数进行测量，对此本申请实施例不做具体限定。
S302：TX UE根据得到的测量结果，对SCI所指示的资源进行资源排除，确定候选 资源集。
TX UE从SCI指示的资源中，将测量结果满足于某一个条件的资源排除，由此便可以得到TX UE的候选资源集，那么，TX UE在传输业务时可以在候选资源集中选择资源进行传输。例如，通过S301，TX UE对SCI进行参考信号接收功率的测量，获得PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP，然后，TX UE可以将PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP满足预设条件的资源排除，或者，TX UE可以根据SCI的指示，将其他UE占用的资源排除，再者，TX UE还可以其他UE占用的资源、且RSRP高于预设门限值的资源排除。
在实际应用中，上述预设条件可以为RSRP值在预设范围内，例如RSRP值在所有测量得到的RSRP值由大到小或者由小到大排序后前20％，或者，RSRP值高于所有RSRP值的70％，当然，上述预设条件还可以为其他条件，如可以根据TX UE的传输优先级与其他UE的SCI中指示的传输优先级来设定，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在一些可能的实施方式中，TX UE还可以通过S301解调SCI，获得资源的子载波间隔配置，RX UE还可以根据资源的子载波间隔配置，对资源进行筛选，使得选择的子载波间隔能够满足传输需求的资源，以供后续侧链路传输使用。
当然，TX UE可以根据其他条件进行资源排除，本申请不做具体限定。
S303：TX UE从候选资源集中选取用于侧链路传输的资源；
其中，TX UE所选取的资源可以理解为预留资源。
在业务到来之后，TX UE首先进行资源选择或资源重选的校验，来确定是否触发资源选择或重选；如果触发资源选择或重选，则TX UE确定资源预留周期、选定混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request，HARQ)重传次数等；然后，TX UE从候选资源集中，根据选定的频域资源数及载波上允许的逻辑信道的可用侧链路数据的剩余包延迟预算(packet delay budge，PDB)选定用于一次传输机会的时频资源，进一步TX UE还可以利用选定的时域资源，以确定好的资源预留周期再选定对应的周期性资源集。若TX UE确定没有重传，则可以将TX UE选定的时域资源及其对应的周期性资源集视为“选定的SL grant(授权)”
可选的，TX UE根据HARQ重传次数，确定有一次或多次重传，且物理层指示的资源中还有可用的资源来用于多次传输机会，则根据选定的频域资源数、选定的HARQ重传次数及载波上允许的逻辑信道的可用SL数据的剩余PDB，从可用资源中为一次或多次传输机会选定时频资源。然后利用该时频资源及资源预留周期选定对应的周期资源集，并将选定的资源及其对应的这周期性资源集视为“选择的SL grant”(资源)
在本申请实施例中，上述S303中的业务可以包括：通信目标、侧链路连接(如源和目标对、sidelink链路等)、逻辑信道、资源池(resource pool)、侧链路业务、MAC PDU、TB等其中的一个或者多个的组合，本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。当业务为MAC PDU时，MAC PDU可以为一个或者多个。需要注意到的是，上述通信目标可以通过destination ID(通信目标标识)来标识，本申请不做具体限定。
S304：TX UE对预留资源进行重新评估；
在进行业务传输之前，TX UE还会对预留资源进行重新评估，看通过S303选择的预留资源是否能够用于侧链路传输，以保证最终选择的资源是可以用于侧链路传输的。
S305：若评估结果表示预留资源无法用于侧链路传输，则TX UE触发资源重选，返回S302；
S306：若评估结果表示预留资源可以用于侧链路传输，则TX UE采用预留资源开始侧链路传输；
S307：在使用预留资源传输的过程中，TX UE判断是否触发资源重选；
在S305和S307中，因为一些原因可能会导致预留资源无法用于侧链路传输，因此，TX UE还需要对第一资源进行评估，判断是否触发资源重选。例如，上述原因可以包括：上层配置或重配资源池；或，无configured sidelink gran；或，在过去一秒MAC实体在任何configured sidelink grant指示的资源上即无新传又无重传；或，配置了sl-ReselectAfter、且configured sidelink grant指示的连续未使用的传输机会达到sl-ReselectAfter；或，configured sidelink grant指示的传输资源不能满足根据对应的逻辑信道的优先级确定的某个逻辑信道上数据的时延要求，且MAC实体选择不进行相应单个MAC PDU的传输；或，UE收到的SCI指示的逻辑信道的优先级比待传数据的逻辑信道的优先级更高，该SCI调度的某个sl传输预期会与当前预留的某个资源重叠，且该SCI指示的sl传输的SL-RSRP测量结果高于门限。当第一资源满足如上述任意条件时，清除该SL process关联的预留资源(若有的话)，并触发TX资源选择/重选。
S308：若触发资源重选，则TX UE返回S302；
S309：若不触发资源重选，则TX UE继续使用预留资源进行侧链路传输。
通过上述过程，TX UE自主选择用于侧链路传输资源。为了节约RX UE的功耗，可以为RX UE配置DRX功能，一个DRX周期(DRX cycle)可以分为激活期(onduration)和睡眠期(opportunity for DRX)，“on duration”的这段时间是UE监控下行PSCCH和/或PSSCH子帧的时间，在这段时间里，UE是处于唤醒状态的，可以接收来自TX UE的传输；“opportunity for DRX”的这段时间是DRX睡眠时间，即UE为了省电，进入了睡眠状态，关闭自身的接收机，而不监控PSCCH和/或PSSCH子帧的时间。这样就可能导致如果RX UE在激活期没有监听到SCI，就会进入睡眠期，从而导致RX UE无法在TX UE所选择的资源上接收侧链路传输。
在实际应用中，DRX配置中的激活期可以为周期性的。
那么，为了解决这个问题，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，可以应用于上述通信系统中的第一通信设备，如TX UE。
首先，需要说明的是，本申请实施例中所说的“资源与DRX激活期在时域上存在交集”可以理解为：资源在时域上全部或者部分位于DRX激活期的时间范围内。反之，“资源与DRX激活期在时域上不存在交集”可以理解为：资源在时域上位于DRX激活期的时间范围外，资源与DRX激活期在时域上是分开的。例如，图4为本申请实施例中的资源与DRX激活期的第一种示意图，参见图4所示，在时域上，资源位于DRX激活期的时间范围内，也就是说该资源包含于DRX激活期；或者，图5为本申请实施例中的资源与DRX激活期的第二种示意图，参见图5所示，在时域上，资源中的一部分，如至少一个符号位于DRX激活期内；图6为本申请实施例中的资源与DRX激活期的第三种示意图，参见图6所示，在时域上，资源没有一个符号位于DRX激活期内。在本申请其他实施例中，资源与DRX激活期在时域上的关系可以参见图4至图6的描述，下面不再 赘述。
在本申请实施例中，“当…时”仅用于表示步骤的执行条件，对步骤的执行时机不做限定，也可以理解为“如果”或者“若”。
在一些可能的实施方式中，DRX配置可以是按照每(per)业务进行配置的，DRX配置信息中可以包括DRX激活期。这里，“业务”可以如上所述，可以包括：通信目标、侧链路连接、源和目标对、sidelink链路、逻辑信道、资源池、侧链路业务、MAC PDU、TB等其中的一个或者多个的组合，本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。
假设，以第一业务为destination ID标识的通信目标为例，可以为每一个destination ID配置DRX配置信息。可以理解的，DRX配置可以是由基站为UE配置的，也可以是TX UE或者RX UE自行确定的，还可以是收发UE之间协商配置的，还可以是预先设置于UE中的，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
图7为本申请实施例中的第一通信设备侧通信方法的第一流程示意图，参见图7所示，该方法。包括：
S701：第一通信设备进行感知(sensing)；
第一通信设备持续监听其他UE发送的SCI，并按照SCI的指示进行测量，获得测量结果。这里，第一通信设备监听到其他UE的SCI后，对SCI进行解调，解调的SCI至少可以反映出sidelink上资源的使用情况。
在本申请实施例中，上述“测量”可以包括基于sidelink DMRS的L1sidelink RSRP的测量，例如，测量PSCCH的RSRP(即PSCCH-RSRP)或者PSSCH-RSRP；或者，还可以测量S-RSSI等。其中PSCCH-RSRP是对PSCCH关联的DMRS测量获得的，PSSCH-RSRP是对PSSCH关联的DMRS测量获得的。当然，第一通信设备还可以对SCI的其他参数进行测量，对此本申请实施例不做具体限定。
S702：第一通信设备根据得到的测量结果，对SCI所指示的资源进行资源排除。
第一通信设备从SCI指示的资源中，将测量结果满足于某一个条件的资源排除，由此便可以得到第一通信设备的候选资源集，那么，第一通信设备在传输业务时可以在候选资源集中选择资源进行传输。例如，通过S701，第一通信设备对SCI进行参考信号接收功率的测量，获得PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP，然后，第一通信设备可以将PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP满足预设条件的资源排除，或者，第一通信设备可以根据SCI的指示，将其他UE占用的资源排除，再者，第一通信设备还可以其他UE占用的资源、且相应RSRP高于预设门限值的资源排除。
在实际应用中，上述预设条件可以为RSRP值在预设范围内，例如RSRP值在所有测量得到的RSRP值由大到小或者由小到大排序后前20％，或者，RSRP值高于所有RSRP值的70％，当然，上述预设条件还可以为其他条件，如可以根据第一通信设备的传输优先级与其他UE的SCI中指示的传输的优先级来设定，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备还可以通过S701解调SCI，获得资源的子载波间隔配置，第一通信设备还可以根据资源的子载波间隔配置，对资源进行筛选，使得选择的子载波间隔满足传输需求的资源，以供后续侧链路传输使用。
当然，第一通信设备可以根据其他条件进行资源排除，本申请不做具体限定。
S703：第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源和第一业务；
第一通信设备通过S702确定第一候选资源，并获取自身当前可确定的第一业务，第一业务可以包括当前业务和/或历史业务。这里，“第一业务”可以如上所述，假设，以第一业务为destination ID标识的通信目标为例，第一通信设备可以确定至少一个destination ID作为候选destination ID集合，候选destination ID集合可以包括第一通信设备当前可选的destination ID，和/或历史可选的destination ID。
S704：第一通信设备从第一候选资源中确定第一资源；
由于DRX配置是针对第一业务进行配置的，那么，第一通信设备可以从第一候选资源中，选择与第一激活期存在交集的资源作为第二候选资源，进而从第二选择资源中确定第一资源。此时，第一资源可以理解为预留资源。
在本申请实施例中，第一通信设备可以通过如S303所述的方法，从第二候选资源中确定第一资源。
在本申请实施例中，为了实现资源与第一业务的DRX激活期匹配，上述第一激活期可以包括第一业务对应的至少一个DRX激活期，例如，第一激活期可以为一个destination ID对应的DRX激活期或者多个destination ID对应的DRX激活期。
可以理解的，如果存在多个destination ID，第一激活期可以为多个destination ID对应的DRX配置中的多个DRX激活期的并集；那么，第一通信设备可以从第一候选资源中选择与该并集存在交集的资源作为第二候选资源，然后，第一通信设备还可以从第二候选资源中选择第一资源，例如，第一通信设备从第一候选资源中选择部分或者全部位于上述等多个DRX激活期所组成的并集中得到资源作为第二候选资源，再从第二候选资源中，根据选定的频域资源数及载波上允许的逻辑信道的可用侧链路数据的剩余PDB选定用于一次传输机会的时频资源，进一步还可以利用选定的时域资源，以确定好的资源预留周期再选定对应的周期性资源。
或者，如果存在一个destination ID，第一激活期可以为该destination ID对应的DRX配置中的多个DRX激活期，那么，第一通信设备可以选择在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集满足第一条件的资源作为第二候选资源。
在实际应用中，上述第一条件可以包括：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集最大、在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集在预设范围(可以为经验值)内、在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集大于预设门限等。例如，一个destination ID对应的DRX激活期为子帧0，那么，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中与子帧0的交集的符号数最大的资源确定为第二候选资源，或者，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中与子帧0的交集的符号数大于80％(也就是11个符号)的资源确定为第二候选资源，再或者，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中在子帧0的符号1至符号12内的资源确定为第二候选资源。类似的，一个destination ID对应的DRX激活期为子帧0、子帧3、子帧6，那么，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中分别与子帧0、子帧3、子帧6存在交集最大的多个资源确定为第二候选资源，即选择第一候选资源中与子帧0的交集最大的资源a，与子帧3交集最大的资源b，与子帧6交集最大的资源c，将资源a、b、c确定为第二候选资源；或者，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中分别与子帧0、子帧3、子帧6的交集的符号数大于80％的多个资源确定为第二候选资源，再或者，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中分别位于子帧0、子帧3、子帧6的符号1至符号12内的多个资源确定为第二候 选资源。当然，第一条件还可以为其他条件，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
至此，第一通信设备完成资源选择。
S705：第一通信设备对第一资源进行重新评估；
在进行业务传输之前，第一通信设备还会对第一资源进行重新评估，看通过S703选择的第一资源是否能够用于侧链路传输。例如，由于存在新业务到达、第一资源被其他UE占用等情况的发生，就可能导致之前选择的第一资源无法用于侧链路传输，所以，第一通信设备需要重新对选择的第一资源进行评估。
S706：若评估结果表示第一资源无法用于侧链路传输，则第一通信设备触发资源重选，返回S702；
S707：若评估结果表示第一资源可以用于侧链路传输，则第一通信设备在采用第一资源开始侧链路传输；
S708：在使用第一资源传输的过程中，第一通信设备判断是否触发资源重选；
第一通信设备在侧链路传输过程中，因为一些原因，可能会导致第一资源无法用于侧链路传输，因此，第一通信设备还需要对第一资源进行评估，判断是否触发资源重选。例如，上述原因可以包括：上层配置或重配资源池；或，无configured sidelink gran；或，在过去一秒MAC实体在任何configured sidelink grant指示的资源上即无新传又无重传；或，配置了sl-ReselectAfter、且configured sidelink grant指示的连续未使用的传输机会达到sl-ReselectAfter；或，configured sidelink grant指示的传输资源不能满足根据对应的逻辑信道的优先级确定的某个逻辑信道上数据的时延要求，且MAC实体选择不进行相应单个MAC PDU的传输；或，UE收到的SCI指示的逻辑信道的优先级比待传数据的逻辑信道的优先级更高，该SCI调度的某个sl传输预期会与当前预留的某个资源重叠，且该SCI指示的sl传输的SL-RSRP测量结果高于门限。当第一资源满足如上述任意条件时，清除该SL process关联的预留资源(若有的话)，并触发TX资源选择/重选。
S709：若触发资源重选，则第一通信设备返回S702；
S710：若不触发资源重选，则第一通信设备继续使用第一资源进行侧链路传输。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备执行S703至S704选择的第一资源还可以作为候选资源，以供第一通信设备从候选资源中选取预留资源，进而执行S705至S710。
在本申请实施例中，通过上述S701至S710所述的方法，第一通信设备选择与第一业务对应的DRX激活期存在交集的资源作为预留资源，并使用该预留资源进行侧链路传输，如此能够保证第一通信设备可以在激活期内接收到来自第二通信设备(如TX UE)的传输，节约RX UE的功耗，并保证第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧链路传输。
在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，如果在存在多个destination ID的场景下，第一通信设备在执行S707使用第一资源开始侧链路传输之前，还可以对第一业务，也就是destination ID进行选择，此时，第一通信设备可以从上述多个destination ID中选择对应的DRX激活期与第一资源在时域上存在交集的destination ID(用于标识第二业务)，也就是说，最后选择的destination ID对应的DRX激活期与预留资源在时域上存在交集。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备还可以在执行S706之前，采用上述方法进行destination ID进行选择，使得选中的destination ID在时域上与预留资源存在交集。
在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，第一通信设备在执行S701时，首先，第一通信设备的MAC层可以确定至少一个DRX配置中DRX激活期在时域上的并集，也就是第一激活期，并向物理层指示，这里，至少一个DRX配置可以为第一通信设备能够确定的部分或者全部DRX配置，例如，至少一个DRX配置可以包括第一业务的DRX配置。然后，物理层在第一激活期内进行sensing，解调其他UE的SCI，并进行测量。例如，测量PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP；或者，测量S-RSSI。其中PSCCH-RSRP是对PSCCH关联的DMRS测量确定的，PSSCH-RSRP是对PSSCH关联的DMRS测量确定的。当然，第一通信设备还可以对SCI指示的资源的其他参数进行测量，对此本申请实施例不做具体限定。
可以理解的，第一通信设备在第一激活期内监听SCI，那么，SCI是位于第一激活期内的，那么，第一通信设备对SCI进行测量，也可以认为是在第一激活期内进行测量。
在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，在第一通信设备进行S702对候选资源进行资源排除时，第一通信设备的MAC层先向物理层指示第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集和/或第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集，然后，物理层从第二资源中排除资源，确定与上述并集存在交集的资源作为第一候选资源，可以理解的，第一候选资源需要满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；在时域上与第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集。
在一些可能的实施例中，物理层还可以进一步地从第一候选资源中执行如上述S702所述的方法来进一步地排除资源，以确定候选资源，进而确定第一资，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
需要说明的是，第二资源可以为物理层通过sensing确定的资源在选择窗中对应的资源，还可以为物理层从通过sensing确定的资源选择中执行S702进行资源排除后剩下的资源。
在本申请其他实施例中，图8为本申请实施例中的第一通信设备侧通信方法的第二流程示意图，参见图8所示，该方法。包括：
S801：第一通信设备确定第二激活期；
S802：第一通信设备在第二激活期内监听其他UE发送的SCI；
这里，SCI用于指示其他UE用于侧链路传输的资源。
在本申请中，第一通信设备的MAC层在确定第二激活期之后，向第一通信设备的物理层指示第二激活期，物理层在第二激活期内监听其他UE发送的SCI，进而物理层在第二激活期内进行测量。
在一些可能的实施方式中，首先，第一通信设备确定至少一个DRX配置中DRX激活期在时域上的并集，也就是第二激活期，这里，至少一个DRX配置可以为第一通信设备能够确定的部分或者全部DRX配置，例如，至少一个DRX配置可以包括第一业务的DRX配置。
进一步地，在S802之后，第一通信设备可以根据SCI，在第二激活期内进行测量，也就是对SCI进行测量。例如，测量PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP；或者，测量S-RSSI。其中PSCCH-RSRP是对PSCCH关联的DMRS测量确定的，PSSCH-RSRP是对 PSSCH关联的DMRS测量确定的。当然，第一通信设备还可以对SCI的其他参数进行测量，对此本申请实施例不做具体限定。
可以理解的，第一通信设备在第二激活期内监听SCI，那么，SCI是位于第二激活期内的，那么，第一通信设备对SCI进行测量，也可以认为是在第二激活期内进行测量。
至此，第一通信设备完成在第二激活期内sensing。
S803：第一通信设备根据得到的测量结果，对SCI所指示资源进行资源排除，确定第一候选资源。
第一通信设备从SCI指示的资源中，将测量结果满足于某一个条件的资源排除，由此便可以得到第一通信设备的候选资源集，那么，第一通信设备在传输业务时可以在候选资源集中选择资源进行传输。例如，通过S801，第一通信设备对SCI进行参考信号接收功率的测量，确定PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP，然后，第一通信设备可以将PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP满足预设条件的资源排除，或者，第一通信设备可以根据SCI的指示，将其他UE占用的资源排除，再者，第一通信设备还可以其他UE占用的资源以及RSRP高于预设门限值的资源排除。
在实际应用中，上述预设条件可以为RSRP值在预设范围内，例如RSRP值在所有测量得到的RSRP值由大到小或者由小到大排序后前20％，或者，RSRP值高于所有RSRP值的低于70％，当然，上述预设条件还可以为其他条件，可以根据第一通信设备的传输优先级与其他UE的SCI中指示的传输优先级来设定，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备还可以通过S801解调SCI，确定资源的子载波间隔配置，第一通信设备还可以根据资源的子载波间隔配置，对资源进行筛选，使得选择的子载波间隔满足传输需求的资源，以供后续侧链路传输使用。
当然，第一通信设备可以根据其他条件进行资源排除，本申请不做具体限定。
S804：第一通信设备从第一候选资源中选取用于侧链路传输的第一资源；
在第一业务到来之后，第一通信设备可以从第一候选资源中针对第一业务选择预留资源，就是第一资源。
在本申请实施例中，上述第一业务可以包括：通信目标、侧链路连接、源和目标对、sidelink链路、逻辑信道、资源池、侧链路业务、MAC PDU、TB等其中的一个或者多个的组合，本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。
S805：第一通信设备对第一资源进行重新评估；
在进行业务传输之前，第一通信设备还会对第一资源进行重新评估，看通过S803选择的第一资源是否能够用于侧链路传输。例如，由于存在新业务到达、第一资源被其他UE占用等情况的发生，就可能导致之前选择的第一资源无法用于侧链路传输，所以，第一通信设备需要重新对选择的第一资源进行评估。
S806：若评估结果表示第一资源无法用于侧链路传输，则第一通信设备触发资源重选，返回S802；
S807：若评估结果表示第一资源可以用于侧链路传输，则第一通信设备在采用第一资源开始侧链路传输；
S808：在使用第一资源传输的过程中，第一通信设备判断是否触发资源重选；
第一通信设备在侧链路传输过程中，因为一些原因，可能会导致第一资源无法用于 侧链路传输，因此，第一通信设备还需要对第一资源进行评估，判断是否触发资源重选。例如，上述原因可以包括：上层配置或重配资源池；或，无configured sidelink gran；或，在过去一秒MAC实体在任何configured sidelink grant指示的资源上即无新传又无重传；或，配置了sl-ReselectAfter、且configured sidelink grant指示的连续未使用的传输机会达到sl-ReselectAfter；或，configured sidelink grant指示的传输资源不能满足根据对应的逻辑信道的优先级确定的某个逻辑信道上数据的时延要求，且MAC实体选择不进行相应单个MAC PDU的传输；或，UE收到的SCI指示的逻辑信道的优先级比待传数据的逻辑信道的优先级更高，该SCI调度的某个sl传输预期会与当前预留的某个资源重叠，且该SCI指示的sl传输的SL-RSRP测量结果高于门限。当第一资源满足如上述任意条件时，清除该SL process关联的预留资源(若有的话)，并触发第一通信设备资源选择/重选。
S809：若触发资源重选，则第一通信设备返回S802；
S810：若不触发资源重选，则第一通信设备继续使用第一资源进行侧链路传输。
在本申请实施例中，通过上述S801至S810所示的方法，第一通信设备选择与第一业务对应的DRX激活期存在交集(即第二激活期)的资源作为预留资源，并使用该预留资源进行侧链路传输，如此能够保证第一通信设备可以在激活期内接收到来自第二通信设备(如TX UE)的传输，节约RX UE的功耗，并保证第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧链路传输。
在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，在S803之后，第一通信设备还可以确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源和第一业务；第一通信设备从第一候选资源中确定第一资源。
第一通信设备通过S803确定第一候选资源后，还可以获取自身当前可确定的第一业务。由于DRX配置是针对第一业务进行配置的，那么，第一通信设备可以从第一候选资源中，选择与第二激活期存在交集的资源作为第二候选资源，进而从第二选择资源中确定第一资源。此时，第一资源可以理解为预留资源。这里，第一业务可以包括当前业务和/或历史业务，“第一业务”如上所述，假设，以第一业务为destination ID标识的通信目标为例，第一通信设备可以确定至少一个destination ID作为候选destination ID集合，候选destination ID集合可以包括第一通信设备当前可选的destination ID，和/或历史可选的destination ID。
在本申请实施例中，为了实现资源与第一业务的DRX激活期匹配，上述第二激活期可以为一个destination ID对应的激活期或者多个destination ID对应的激活期。
那么，如果存在多个destination ID，第二激活期可以为多个destination ID对应的DRX配置中的多个DRX激活期的并集；那么，第一通信设备可以从第一候选资源中选择与该并集存在交集的资源作为第二候选资源，然后，第一通信设备还可以从第二候选资源中选择第一资源，例如，第一通信设备从第一候选资源中选择部分或者全部位于上述等多个DRX激活期所组成的并集中得到资源作为第二候选资源，再从第二候选资源中，根据选定的频域资源数及载波上允许的逻辑信道的可用侧链路数据的剩余PDB选定用于一次传输机会的时频资源，进一步还可以利用选定的时域资源，以确定好的资源预留周期再选定对应的周期性资源。
或者，如果存在一个destination ID，第二激活期可以为该destination ID对应的DRX配置中的多个DRX激活期，那么，第一通信设备可以选择在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集满足第一条件的资源作为第二候选资源。
在实际应用中，上述第一条件可以包括：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集最大、在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集在预设范围内、在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集大于预设门限等中的一个或多个。例如，一个destination ID对应的DRX激活期为子帧0，那么，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中与子帧0的交集的符号数最大的资源确定为第二候选资源，或者，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中与子帧0的交集的符号数大于80％(即11个符号)的资源确定为第二候选资源，再者，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中在子帧0的符号1至符号12内的资源确定为第二候选资源。类似的，一个destination ID对应对的DRX激活期为子帧0、子帧3、子帧6，那么，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中分别与子帧0、子帧3、子帧6的交集为最大的多个资源确定为第二候选资源，或者，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中分别与子帧0、子帧3、子帧6的交集的符号数大于80％(即11个符号)的多个资源确定为第二候选资源，再者，第一通信设备将第一候选资源中分别位于子帧0、子帧3、子帧6的符号1至符号12内的多个资源确定为第二候选资源。当然，第一条件还可以为其他条件，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备执行S804选择的第一资源还可以作为候选资源，以供第一通信设备从候选资源中选取预留资源，进而执行S805至S810。
在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，在存在多个destination ID的场景下，第一通信设备在执行S807使用第一资源开始侧链路传输之前，还可以对第一业务，也就是destination ID进行选择，此时，第一通信设备可以从上述多个destination ID中选择对应的DRX激活期与第一资源在时域上存在交集的destination ID(用于标识第二业务)，也就是说，最后选择的destination ID对应的DRX激活期与预留资源在时域上存在交集。
在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，在第一通信设备进行S803对候选资源进行资源排除时，第一通信设备的MAC层先向物理层指示第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集和/或第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集，然后，物理层从第二资源中进行资源排除，确定与上述并集存在交集的资源作为第三候选资源，也就是说，第三候选资源需要满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；在时域上与第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集。第三候选资源就可以作为上述第一候选资源，当然，物理层也可以进一步地从第三候选资源中执行如S803所述的方法来确定第一候选资源，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在本申请中，第二资源可以为物理层通过sensing确定的资源在选择窗中对应的资源，还可以为物理层从通过sensing确定的资源选择中执行S702进行资源排除后剩下的资源。
在本申请其他实施例中，图9为本申请实施例中的第一通信设备侧通信方法的第三流程示意图，参见图9所示，该方法。包括：
S901：第一通信设备进行感知(sensing)；
第一通信设备持续监听其他UE发送的SCI，并按照SCI的指示，对SCI所指示的资源进行测量，确定测量结果。这里，第一通信设备监听到其他UE的SCI后，对SCI进行解调，解调的SCI至少可以反映出sidelink上资源的使用情况。
在本申请实施例中，上述“测量”可以包括基于sidelink DMRS的sidelink RSRP的测量，例如，测量PSCCH的RSRP(即PSCCH-RSRP)或者PSSCH-RSRP；或者，还可以测量S-RSSI等。其中PSCCH-RSRP是对PSCCH关联的DMRS测量确定的，PSSCH-RSRP是对PSSCH关联的DMRS测量确定的。当然，第一通信设备还可以对SCI指示的资源的其他参数进行测量，对此本申请实施例不做具体限定。
S902：第一通信设备确定第四资源；
在本申请实施例中，第四资源可以为在选择窗的资源，还可以为选择窗中的资源进行资源排除后剩下的资源。
S903：第一通信设备从第四资源中确定出第三候选资源；
这里，第三候选资源需要满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；在时域上与第一业务中当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；
第一通信设备在进行S901之后，第一通信设备的MAC层先向物理层指示第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集和/或第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集，也就是第一激活期，然后，物理层从第四资源中进行资源排除，确定与上述并集存在交集的资源作为第三候选资源，也就是说，第三候选资源需要满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；在时域上与第一业务中的当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集。那么，第三候选资源可以用于确定第五资资源。
当然，物理层还可以进一步地从第三候选资源中进一步排除资源，例如，第一通信设备从第三候选资源中，将测量结果满足于某一个条件的资源排除，将剩下的资源确定为第一通信设备的候选资源，进而第一通信设备还可以在传输第一业务时从候选资源中确定第五资源进行传输。例如，通过S902，第一通信设备对SCI进行参考信号接收功率的测量，确定PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP，然后，第一通信设备可以将PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP满足预设条件的资源排除，或者，第一通信设备可以根据SCI的指示，将其他UE占用的资源排除，再者，第一通信设备还可以其他UE占用的资源、且相应RSRP高于预设门限值的资源排除。
在实际应用中，上述预设条件可以为RSRP值在预设范围内，例如RSRP值在所有测量得到的RSRP值由大到小或者由小到大排序后前20％，或者，RSRP值高于所有RSRP值的70％，当然，上述预设条件还可以为其他条件，可以根据第一通信设备的传输优先级与其他UE的SCI中指示的传输优先级来设定，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备还可以通过S901解调SCI，确定资源的子载波间隔配置，第一通信设备还可以根据资源的子载波间隔配置，对资源进行筛选，使得选择的子载波间隔满足传输需求的资源，以供后续侧链路传输使用。
当然，第一通信设备可以根据其他条件进行资源排除，本申请不做具体限定。
S904：第一通信设备从第三候选资源中选取用于侧链路传输的第五资源；
在第一业务到来之后，第一通信设备可以从第三候选资源集中，针对第一业务选择预留资源，就是第五资源。
在本申请实施例中，上述第一业务可以包括：通信目标、侧链路连接、源和目标对、sidelink链路、LCH、资源池、侧链路业务、MAC PDU、TB等其中的一个或者多个的组合，本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。
S905：第一通信设备对第五资源进行重新评估；
在进行业务传输之前，第一通信设备还会对第五资源进行重新评估，看通过S903选择的第五资源是否能够用于侧链路传输，以保证最终选择的资源是可以用于侧链路传输的。
S906：若评估结果表示第五资源无法用于侧链路传输，则第一通信设备触发资源重选，返回S902；
S907：若评估结果表示第五资源可以用于侧链路传输，则第一通信设备在采用第五资源开始侧链路传输；
S908：在使用第五资源传输的过程中，第一通信设备持续判断是否触发资源重选；
在S905和S908中，第一通信设备在侧链路传输过程中，因为一些原因，可能会导致第一资源无法用于侧链路传输，因此，第一通信设备还需要对第一资源进行评估，判断是否触发资源重选。例如，上述原因可以包括：上层配置或重配资源池；或，无configured sidelink gran；或，在过去一秒MAC实体在任何configured sidelink grant指示的资源上即无新传又无重传；或，配置了sl-ReselectAfter、且configured sidelink grant指示的连续未使用的传输机会达到sl-ReselectAfter；或，configured sidelink grant指示的传输资源不能满足根据对应的逻辑信道的优先级确定的某个逻辑信道上数据的时延要求，且MAC实体选择不进行相应单个MAC PDU的传输；或，UE收到的SCI指示的逻辑信道的优先级比待传数据的逻辑信道的优先级更高，该SCI调度的某个sl传输预期会与当前预留的某个资源重叠，且该SCI指示的sl传输的SL-RSRP测量结果高于门限。当第一资源满足如上述任意条件时，清除该SL process关联的预留资源(若有的话)，并触发第一通信设备资源选择/重选。
S909：若触发资源重选，则第一通信设备返回S902；
S910：若不触发资源重选，则第一通信设备继续使用第五资源进行侧链路传输。
在本申请实施例中，通过上述S901至S910所示的方法，第一通信设备选择与第一业务对应的DRX激活期存在交集的资源作为预留资源，并使用该预留资源进行侧链路传输，如此能够保证第一通信设备可以在激活期内接收到来自第二通信设备(如TX UE)的传输，节约RX UE的功耗，并保证第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧链路传输。
在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，第一通信设备在执行S901时，首先，确定至少一个DRX配置中DRX激活期在时域上的并集，也就是第一激活期，这里，至少一个DRX配置可以为第一通信设备能够确定的部分或者全部DRX配置，例如，至少一个DRX配置可以包括第一业务的DRX配置。然后，第一通信设备在第一激活期内进行sensing，解调其他UE的SCI，并对SCI进行测量。例如，测量PSCCH-RSRP或者PSSCH-RSRP；或者，测量S-RSSI。其中PSCCH- RSRP是对PSCCH关联的DMRS测量确定的，PSSCH-RSRP是对PSSCH关联的DMRS测量确定的。当然，第一通信设备还可以对SCI指示的资源的其他参数进行测量，对此本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在本申请实施例中，第一通信设备的MAC层在确定第一激活期之后，向第一通信设备的物理层指示第一激活期，物理层在第一激活期内监听其他UE发送的SCI，进而物理层在第一激活期内进行测量。
在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，在S903之后，第一通信设备还可以确定用于侧链路传输的第三候选资源和第一业务；第一通信设备从第三候选资源中确定第五资源。
第一通信设备通过S903确定第三候选资源后，还可以获取自身当前可确定的第一业务。由于DRX配置是针对第一业务进行配置的，那么，第一通信设备可以从第三候选资源中，选择与第一激活期存在交集的资源作为第五资源。此时，第五资源可以为预留资源。这里，第一业务可以包括当前业务和/或历史业务，“第一业务”如上所述，假设，以第一业务为destination ID标识的通信目标为例，第一通信设备可以确定至少一个destination ID作为候选destination ID集合，候选destination ID集合可以包括第一通信设备当前可选的destination ID，和/或历史可选的destination ID。
在本申请实施例中，为了实现资源与第一业务的DRX激活期匹配，上述第一激活期可以为一个destination ID对应的激活期或者多个destination ID对应的激活期的并集。
那么，如果存在多个destination ID，第一激活期可以为多个destination ID对应的DRX配置中的多个DRX激活期的并集；那么，第一通信设备可以从第三候选资源中选择与该并集存在交集的资源作为第四候选资源，然后，第一通信设备还可以从第四候选资源中选择第五资源，例如，第一通信设备从第三候选资源中选择部分或者全部位于上述等多个DRX激活期所组成的并集中得到资源作为第四候选资源，再从第四候选资源中，根据选定的频域资源数及载波上允许的逻辑信道的可用侧链路数据的剩余PDB选定用于一次传输机会的时频资源，进一步还可以利用选定的时域资源，以确定好的资源预留周期再选定对应的周期性资源。
或者，如果存在一个destination ID，第一激活期可以为该destination ID对应的DRX配置中的多个DRX激活期，那么，第一通信设备可以选择在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集满足第一条件的资源作为第四候选资源。
在实际应用中，上述第一条件可以包括以下一个或者多个：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集最大、在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集在预设范围内、在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的交集大于预设门限等。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备执行S904选择的第五资源还可以作为候选资源，以供第一通信设备从候选资源中选取预留资源，进而执行S905至S910。
在一些可能的实施方式中，为了提高预留资源与第一业务的DRX激活期的匹配程度，在多个destination ID的场景下，第一通信设备在执行S907使用第五资源开始侧链路传输之前，还可以对destination ID进行选择，此时，第一通信设备可以从上述多个destination ID中选择对应的DRX激活期与第五资源在时域上存在交集的destination ID (用于标识第二业务)，也就是说，最后选择的destination ID对应的DRX激活期与预留资源在时域上存在交集。
在本申请实施例中，在上述一个或者多个实施例中，第一通信设备可以持续对第三资源(即第一通信设备选择的预留资源)进行评估，若第一通信设备确定第三资源与第一通信设备的当前业务(第三业务或者第四业务)对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，也就是说，第三资源在时域上位于当前业务对应的DRX激活期之外，那么，第一通信设备触发资源重选，以重新选择与第当前业务的DRX激活期存在交集的资源。
需要说明的是，当前业务是第一通信设备对第三资源进行评估时的业务，可以与第一业务可以相同，也可以与第一业务不相同。例如，第三业务可以包括：通信目标、侧链路连接、源和目标对、sidelink链路、逻辑信道、资源池、侧链路业务、MAC PDU、TB等其中的一个或者多个的组合，本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。第四业务可以包括：可以包括：通信目标、侧链路连接、源和目标对、sidelink链路、逻辑信道、资源池、侧链路业务、MAC PDU、TB等其中的一个或者多个的组合，本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。
第一通信设备在进行侧链路传输的过程中，由于业务发生变化，如有新业务到达、当前资源池发生变化、当前资源发生重配等，导致第三资源无法用于侧链路传输，例如，第三资源不满足第一业务的时延要求，此时，第一通信设备可以触发资源重选。进一步地，第一通信设备还可以考虑第三资源与当前业务的DRX激活期的关系，来决定是否触发资源重选。
举例来说，图10为本申请实施例中的资源与当前业务对应的DRX激活期的示意图，参见图10所示，当前业务在t1时刻到达，第三资源的开始时间t2与t1之间的时间差满足当前业务的时延要求，但是，由于第三资源位于当前业务对应的DRX激活期之外，即第三资源与当前业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，此时，第一通信设备触发资源重选。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述第三资源与第一通信设备的当前业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，可以包括：第三资源与当前业务对应的多个DRX激活期的并集不存在交集；或者，第三资源与当前业务对应的多个DRX激活期中的至少一个DRX激活期不存在交集；或者，第三资源与当前业务对应的多个DRX激活期中满足预设数量的DRX激活期不存在交集。可以理解的，当前业务对应的多个DRX激活期中与第三资源不存在交集的DRX激活期达到预设数量(可以为经验值)，或者在预设数量范围(可以为经验值)内，第一通信设备确定第三资源与当前业务对应的多个DRX激活期中满足预设数量的DRX激活期不存在交集。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备还可以为第一资源配置周期，那么，第一通信设备可以将第一业务对应的DRX配置中满足第二条件的DRX周期(即DRX cycle)配置为第一资源对应的周期。
这里，第二条件可以包括：第一业务对应的DRX配置中DRX周期的最小值、第一业务对应的DRX配置中DRX周期小于预设门限、第一业务对应的DRX配置中DRX周期小于20％等，第二条件还可以为其他条件，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
需要说明的是，第一通信设备为第一资源配置周期与第一通信设备选择第一资源并 无执行的先后顺序，两者可以先后执行，也可以同时执行。当两者先后执行时，第一通信设备可以先为第一资源配置周期再选择第一资源，也可以先选择第一资源再为第一资源配置周期。对于第一通信设备为第一资源配置周期与第一通信设备选择第一资源的执行时机，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在本申请实施例中，通过将第一资源的周期选取为第一业务对应的所有DRX配置的周期的最小值，以使得第一通信设备醒来监听SCI的周期与第一业务发送的周期相匹配，从而提升了侧链路资源被有效利用的概率。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，可以应用于上述通信系统，其中，第一通信设备可以为TX UE，也可以为RX UE，相应地，第二通信设备可以为RX UE，也可以为TX UE。
图11为本申请实施例中的通信方法的流程示意图，参见图11所示，该方法可以包括：
S1101：第一通信设备确定第一资源池或第一资源池中的资源满足第三条件；
这里，第一资源池是第一通信设备当前进行资源选择的资源池；
在一些可能的实施方式中，第三条件包括：当前资源池的信道拥塞率(channel busy ratio，CBR)满足第四条件，如第四条件可以为CBR大于预设值(可以经验值)或者CBR在预设范围内、第一通信设备触发资源池重选和/或丢包率满足第五条件，如第五条件可以为丢包率大于预设值(可以经验值)，或者丢包率在预设范围内等。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第三条件还可以包括以下一个条件或者多个条件的组合：CBR满足第四条件达到第一阈值、第一通信设备触发资源池重选的次数达到第二阈值、第二通信设备的丢包率满足第五条件的次数达到第三阈值。其中，第一阈值、第二阈值以及第三阈值可以为经验值，如3次、5次、8次。
在本申请实施例中，第三条件不限于上述几种情况，对此不做具体限定。
S1102：第一通信设备进行DRX配置；
第一通信设备在执行S1101之后，执行S1102,，以使得第一通信设备选择能够用于侧链路传输的资源池。
S1103：第一通信设备指示第二通信设备进行DRX配置。
需要说明的是，这里所说的“DRX配置”可以理解为根据预留资源进行DRX配置，例如，根据预留资源进行DRX重配，使得预留资源在时域上与重配后的DRX激活期存在交集；或者，根据预留资源进行DRX初配，使得预留资源在时域上与配置的DRX激活期存在交集。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述“DRX配置”还可以理解为使能(enable)或者去使能(disabled)DRX功能，也就是说第一通信设备可以指示第二通信设备配置DRX功能或者取消DRX功能。进一步地，如果第一通信设备指示第二通信设备配置DRX功能，那么，第一通信设备可以同时向第二通信设备发送DRX配置信息，或者，由第二通信设备自行配置DRX配置信息，当然，第二通信设备还可以通过其他方式确定DRX配置信息，对此，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在本申请其他实施例中，第一通信设备在执行S1101之后，还可以执行S1103，以指示第二通信设备选择能够用于侧链路传输的资源池。
在一些可能的实施方式中，S1103可以包括：第一指示消息用于向第二通信设备通知第一通信设备的当前资源池或当前资源池中的资源满足第三条件；或者，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第二指示消息，第二指示消息用于指示第二通信设备进行DRX配置；和/或，第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第三指示消息，第三指示消息用于指示DRX配置信息。
在实际应用中，DRX配置信息可以包括部分或者全部的侧链路DRX参数。可选的，DRX参数可以包括以下一个或多个参数：SL DRX持续时间定时器(drx-onDurationTimerSL)、SL DRX时隙补偿(drx-SlotOffsetSL)、SL DRX静止定时器(drx-InactivityTimerSL)、SL DRX重传定时器(drx-RetransmissionTimerSL)、SL DRX长周期起始补偿(drx-LongCycleStartOffsetSL)、SL DRX长周期(drx-LongCycleSL)、SL DRX短周期(drx-ShortCycleSL)、SL DRX短周期定时器(drx-ShortCycleTimerSL)或者SL DRX HARQ往返时延(round trip time，RTT)定时器(drx-HARQ-RTT-TimerSL)。这里，可以理解的上述参数中所说的“定时器”实际上是指该定时器的长度。
在本申请其他实施例中，如果第一通信设备为TX UE，那么，在S1101之前，第一通信设备还可以接收来自第二通信设备(RX UE)的第四指示消息，第四指示消息用于指示第二通信设的丢包率或者丢包率满足第五条件，例如，第五条件可以为丢包率大于预设值(可以经验值)，或者丢包率在预设范围内。当然，第五条件还可以为其他条件，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第二通信设备还可以在丢包率满足第五条件达到第四阈值，如丢包率满足第五条件达到3次、5次或者10次，第二通信设备向第一通信设备发送第四指示信息，此时第四指示信息可以用于指示最近一次的丢包率或者最近一次的丢包率满足第五条件。在实际应用中，第二通信设备发送第四指示信息的触发条件还可以为其他条件，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
基于相同的发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为第一通信设备中的芯片或者片上系统，还可以为第一通信设备中用于实现上述任一实施例所述方法的功能模块。该芯片或者片上系统包括存储器，存储器中存储有指令，当指令被片上系统或者芯片调用的时候，执行上述方法。图12为本申请实施例中的通信装置的一种结构示意图，参见图12所示，该通信装置1200可以包括：确定模块1201；还可以包括触发模块1202、监听模块1203、配置模块1204或者指示模块1205中的一个或者多个。
在一些可能的实施方式中，确定模块1201，用于确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源和第一业务；从第一候选资源中确定第一资源，第一资源与第一激活期在时域上存在交集，第一激活期是根据第一业务对应的DRX激活期确定的。
在一些可能的实施方式中，确定模块1201，用于将第一候选资源中在时域上与第一激活期存在交集的资源确定为第二候选资源；从第二候选资源中确定第一资源。
在一些可能的实施方式中，确定模块1201，还用于将第一候选资源中在时域上包含于第一激活期的资源确定为第二候选资源。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述装置还可以包括：选择模块，用于选择第二业 务，第二业务对应的DRX激活期与第一资源在时域上存在交集。
在一些可能的实施方式中，触发模块1202，用于若第一资源与第一通信设备的第三业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，则触发资源重选。
在一些可能的实施方式中，确定模块1201，还用于将第一业务对应的DRX配置中满足第二条件的DRX周期确定为第一周期，第一周期为第一资源对应的周期。
在一些可能的实施方式中，确定模块1201，还用于在确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源之前，确定第一激活期；监听模块1203，用于在第一激活期内监听SCI，SCI用于指示其他通信设备用于侧链路传输的资源。
可选的，上述装置还可以包括：测量模块，用于根据SCI，在第一激活期内进行测量。
在一些可能的实施方式中，确定模块1202，具体用于确定用于侧链路传输的第二资源；从第二资源中确定出第一候选资源，第一候选资源满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集，第一业务包括当前业务和/或历史业务；在时域上与当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集。
基于相同的发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为第一通信设备中的芯片或者片上系统，还可以为第一通信设备中用于实现上述任一实施例所述方法的功能模块。该芯片或者片上系统包括存储器，存储器中存储有指令，当指令被片上系统或者芯片调用的时候，执行上述方法。仍参见图12所示，确定模块1201，还用于确定用于侧链路传输的第三资源；触发模块1202，用于若第三资源与第一通信设备的第四业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，则触发资源重选。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第三资源与第一业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，包括：第三资源与第四业务对应的DRX激活期的多个并集不存在交集；或者，第三资源与第四业务对应的多个DRX激活期中的至少一个DRX激活期不存在交集；或者，第三资源与第四业务对应的多个DRX激活期中满足预设数量的DRX激活期不存在交集。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一业务对应的DRX激活期包括以下至少一个：通信目标对应的DRX激活期、侧链路连接对应的DRX激活期、源和目标对对应的DRX激活期、侧链路链接对应的DRX激活期、逻辑信道对应的DRX激活期、资源池对应的DRX激活期、侧链路业务对应的DRX激活期、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU对应的DRX激活期、传输块TB对应的DRX激活期。
基于相同的发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为第一通信设备中的芯片或者片上系统，还可以为第一通信设备中用于实现上述任一实施例所述方法的功能模块。该芯片或者片上系统包括存储器，存储器中存储有指令，当指令被片上系统或者芯片调用的时候，执行上述方法。仍参见12所示，确定模块1201，还用于确定第二激活期，第二激活期为至少一个DRX配置中DRX激活期在时域上的并集；监听模块1203，还用于在第二激活期内监听侧链路控制信息SCI，SCI用于指示其他通信设备用于侧链路传输的资源；
进一步地，上述装置还可以包括：测量模块，用于根据SCI，在第二激活期内进 行测量。
在一些可能的实施方式中，至少一个DRX配置包括第一业务的DRX配置。
基于相同的发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为第一通信设备中的芯片或者片上系统，还可以为第一通信设备中用于实现上述任一实施例所述方法的功能模块。该芯片或者片上系统包括存储器，存储器中存储有指令，当指令被片上系统或者芯片调用的时候，执行上述方法。仍参见图12所示，确定模块1201，用于确定用于侧链路传输的第四资源；从第四资源中确定出第三候选资源，第三候选资源满足以下至少一个条件：在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集，第一业务包括当前业务和/或历史业务；在时域上与当前业务及历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；其中，第三候选资源用于确定用于侧链路传输的第五资源。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一业务对应的DRX激活期包括以下至少一个：通信目标对应的DRX激活期、侧链路连接对应的DRX激活期、源和目标对对应的DRX激活期、侧链路链接对应的DRX激活期、逻辑信道对应的DRX激活期、资源池对应的DRX激活期、侧链路业务对应的DRX激活期、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU对应的DRX激活期、传输块TB对应的DRX激活期。
基于相同的发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为第一通信设备中的芯片或者片上系统，还可以为第一通信设备中用于实现上述任一实施例所述方法的功能模块。该芯片或者片上系统包括存储器，存储器中存储有指令，当指令被片上系统或者芯片调用的时候，执行上述方法。仍参见图12所示，确定模块1201，用于确定第一资源池或第一资源池中的资源满足第三条件，第一资源池是第一通信设备当前进行资源选择的资源池；配置模块1204，用于进行非连续接收DRX配置，和/或指示模块1205，用于指示第二通信设备进行DRX配置，第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间进行侧链路通信。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第三条件包括以下至少一个：当前资源池的信道拥塞率CBR满足第四条件；CRB满足第四条件的次数达到第一阈值；第一通信设备触发资源池重选；第一通信设备触发资源池重选的次数达到第二阈值；第二通信设备的丢包率满足第五条件或第二通信设备的丢包率满足第五条件的次数达到第三阈值。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第四条件包括：CBR大于第一预设值，或者CBR位于第一预设区间内；和/或，第五条件包括：丢包率大于第二预设值，或者丢包率位于第二预设区间内。
在一些可能的实施方式中，指示模块1205，用于向第二通信设备发送第一指示消息，第一指示消息用于向第二通信设备通知第一通信设备的当前资源池或当前资源池中的资源满足第三条件；或者，向第二通信设备发送第二指示消息，第二指示消息用于指示第二通信设备进行DRX配置；和/或，向第二通信设备发送第三指示消息，第三指示消息用于指示DRX配置信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述装置还可以包括：接收模块，用于接收来自第二通信设备的第四指示消息，第四指示消息用于指示丢包率或者丢包率满足第五条件。
基于相同的发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，可以应用于上述通信系 统。该通信装置可以与上述一个或者多个实施例所述的第一通信设备一致。图13为本申请实施例中的通信装置的另一种结构示意图，参见图13所示，该通信装置1300可以包括：包括处理器1301、存储器1302、总线1303、输入设备1304、输出设备1305。
具体的，存储器1302可以包括以易失性和/或非易失性存储器形式的计算机存储媒体，如只读存储器和/或随机存取存储器。存储器1302可以存储操作系统、应用程序、其他程序模块、可执行代码、程序数据、用户开户数据、用户订阅数据等。
输入设备1304可以用于向第一通信设备输入命令和信息，输入设备1304如键盘或指向设备，如鼠标、轨迹球、触摸板、麦克风、操纵杆、游戏垫、卫星电视天线、扫描仪或类似设备。这些输入设备可以通过总线1303连接至处理器1301。
输出设备1305可以用于向第一通信设备输出信息，除了监视器之外，输出设备1305还可以为其他外围输出设各，如扬声器和/或打印设备，这些输出设备也可以通过总线1303连接到处理器1301。
第一通信设备可以通过网络接口1306连接到网络中，例如连接到局域网(local area network，LAN)。在联网环境下，第一通信设备中存储的计算机执行指令可以存储在远程存储设备中，而不限于在本地存储。
当第一通信设备中的处理器1301执行存储器1302中存储的可执行代码或应用程序时，可以执行以上实施例中的第一通信设备一侧的方法步骤，具体执行过程参见上述实施例，在此不再赘述。
此外，上述存储器1302中存储有用于实现上述确定模块、触发模块、监听模块、配置模块、指示模块以及测量模块的功能的计算机执行指令。上述确定模块、触发模块、监听模块、配置模块、指示模块以及测量模块的功能/实现过程均可以通过图13中的处理器1301调用存储器1302中存储的计算机执行指令来实现，具体实现过程和功能参考上述相关实施例。
基于相同的发明构思，在本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法，该方法可以应用于一通信系统，图14为本申请实施例中的通信系统的又一种架构示意图，参见图14所示，该通信系统10可以包括：第一通信设备141、第二通信设备142以及第三通信设备143，其中，针对不同的应用场景，第一通信设备可以为发送终端设备(记为TX UE)或接收终端设备(记为RX UE)，第二通信设备可以为TX UE、RX UE、TX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)或RX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)，第三通信设备也可以为TX UE、RX UE、TX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)或RX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)。
在侧链路传输的过程中，上述第一通信设备可以收到第二通信设备为第一通信设备对应的第一侧链路配置的第一DRX配置信息，还可以收到第三通信设备为第一通信设备对应的第二侧链路配置的第一资源配置信息。其中，第一DRX配置信息可以包括部分或者全部的侧链路DRX参数。进一步地，第一DRX配置信息用于指示第一侧链路的DRX激活时段，例如，DRX激活时段可以包括：DRX激活期(onduration)或者活动时长(active time)。这里，活动时长可以包括激活定时器(onduration timer)的时长、重传定时器(retransmission timer)的时长、静止定时器(inactivity timer)的时长等，当然，active time还包括其他时段，本申请实施例不做 具体限定。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一侧链路可以为第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的侧链路，也可以为第一通信设备与其他终端设备(可以记为其他UE)之间的侧链路。那么，第一DRX配置信息可以用于第一通信设备与第二通信设备之间的第一侧链路，还可以用于第一通信设备与其他UE之间的第一侧链路。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一侧链路可以为一条或者多条侧链路，第二侧链路也可以为一条或者多条侧链路。需要注意的是，当第一侧链路为一条侧链路时，第二侧链路与第一侧链路可以为同一侧链路，或者第二侧链路与第一侧链路为不同侧链路，例如，第一侧链路为TX UE与RX UE之间的侧链路，而第二侧链路可以为RX UE与TX UE之间的侧链路，也可以为RX UE作为TX UE与其他RX UE之间的侧链路。第一侧链路还可以为TX UE或者RX UE与其他UE之间的侧链路，而第二侧链路可以为RX UE与TX UE之间的侧链路，也可以为TX UE或者RX UE与其他UE之间的侧链路。进一步地，当第一侧链路为多条侧链路时，第二侧链路可以为第一侧链路中的一条或者多条，也就是说，第二侧链路为第一侧链路中的部分侧链路或者全部侧链路。
在本申请实施例中，第一通信设备可以为自身配置第一DRX配置信息，而第三通信设备为第一通信设备配置第一资源配置信息；或者，第二通信设备可以为第一通信设备配置第一DRX配置信息，第一通信设备为自身配置第一资源配置信息；或者，第二通信设备可以为第一通信设备配置第一DRX配置信息，第三通信设备为第一通信设备配置第一资源配置信息。可见，由于DRX配置信息和资源配置信息是由不同的主体进行配置的，那么，DRX配置信息所指示的DRX激活时段与资源配置信息所指示的时间区域可能会在一个或者多个时间段内存在冲突，例如，参见图6所示，DRX激活期与时域区间没有交集，或者，参见图5所示，DRX激活期与时区间的交集小于某一与阈值，此时，可以称为DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配。在本申请实施例中，上述“一个时间段”可以指已发生的时域区间对应的时隙，也可以指未发生的时域区间对应的时隙。
进一步地，对于mode1来说，上述时域区间可以为基站为UE配置的资源对应的时域区间；对于mode2来说，上述时域区间可以为基站为UE配置的资源池、对端UE为UE配置的资源池或者UE自己选择的资源池中的时域区间。在实际应用中，上述时域区间可以采用符号(symbol)、时隙(slot)、子帧、系统帧、超帧等表示。
具体来说，如果n个DRX激活时段(由DRX配置信息指示的)与时域区间(由资源配置信息指示的)重叠的时隙数小于预设阈值(如n个onduration与时域区间的总重叠时隙数＜b)，则可以认为DRX激活时段与时域区间在一个时间段内存在冲突；或者，n个DRX激活时段与时域区间重叠的时隙数除以n倍的DRX激活期的时隙数小于预设阈值(如n个onduration与时域区间的总重叠时隙数/(n×onduration时隙数)＜a)，则可以认为DRX激活时段与时域区间在一个时间段内存在冲突。其中，上述参数n、a、b可以由网络根据资源池的CBR、业务特性等因素确定，并通过系统信息、RRC消息或者MAC CE/SCI配置或者预配置；或者，n的取值也可定义 为(onduration的时隙数与时域区间的位图(bitmap)的长度的最小公倍数)/onduration的时隙数。当然，上述参数n、a、b还可以存在其他的取值情况，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
结合上述通信系统，本申请提供一种通信方法。在该通信方法中，若第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配，则第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一信息，和/或向第三通信设备发送第二信息。也就是说，若第一DRX配置信息指示的激活时段与第一资源配置信息所指示的时域区间在至少一个时间段内存在冲突，则第一通信设备向第二通信设备(为第一通信设备配置DRX配置信息的主体)发送第一信息，以请求第二通信设备为第一通信设备的第一侧链路配置(可以是初次配置，也可以是重新配置)DRX配置信息(此时，第一资源配置信息可以为第一通信设备自己配置的，也可以是第三通信设备为第一通信设备配置的)；或者，若第一DRX配置信息指示的激活时段与第一资源配置信息所指示的时域区间在至少一个时间段内存在冲突，则第一通信设备向第三通信设备(为第一通信设备配置资源配置信息的主体)发送第二信息，以请求第三通信设备为第一通信设备的第二侧链路配置(可以是初次配置，也可以是重新配置)资源配置信息(此时，第一DRX配置信息可以为第二通信设备为第一通信设备配置的，也可以是第一通信设备自己配置的)。在一些可能的实施方式中，上述第一资源配置信息可以为当前的资源配置信息，第一DRX配置信息可以为第一通信设备收到的DRX配置信息。那么，图15为本申请实施例中的第一通信设备侧通信方法的第四流程示意图，参见图15中实线所示，该方法包括：
S1501：第一通信设备接收来自第二通信设备的第一DRX配置信息；
这里，第一通信设备接收第二通信设备为第一侧链路配置的第一DRX配置信息。
S1502：第一通信设备判断第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息是否匹配；若是，流程结束，若否，执行S1504；
其中，第一资源配置信息可以为第一通信设备当前的资源配置信息。
这里，第一通信设备在通过S1501接收到第一DRX配置信息之后，判断第一DRX配置信息与第一通信设备当前的资源配置信息(即第一资源配置信息)是否匹配。
示例性地，参见图15中虚线所示，在S1501之前，上述方法还可以包括：S1503：第一通信设备接收来自第三通信设备的第一资源配置信息。
这里，第一通信设备接收第三通信设备为第二侧链路配置的第一资源配置信息，然后，第一通信设备可以按照第一资源配置信息确定第二侧链路对应的时域区间。接下来，第一通信设备可以在该时域区间上进行第二侧链路传输。此时，第一资源配置信息可以理解为第一通信设备当前的资源配置信息。
S1504：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一信息，和/或第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送第二信息。
在本申请实施例中，第一通信设备在判断DRX配置信息与当前的资源配置信息不匹配的时候，可以向第二通信设备请求进行DRX配置，和/或向第三通信设备请求进行资源配置，使得DRX配置信息与资源配置信息相匹配。
下面以具体场景为例，对上述通信方法进行说明。
第一种情况，第一通信设备为TX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE，第三通信设备为 TX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)。图16为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第一种场景示意图，参见图16所示，RX UE或者RX UE所属的基站为TX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站为TX UE配置第一资源配置信息。其中，第一DRX配置信息可以用于RX UE与TX UE之间的第一侧链路，还可以用于RX UE与其他UE之间的第一侧链路，第一资源配置信息可以用于指示mode1中基站为TX UE配置的资源，也可以用于指示mode2中TX UE对应的资源池。
可以理解的，在第一种情况中，TX UE可以自己确定第一资源配置信息，那么，TX UE在通过S1501收到来自RX UE的第一DRX配置信息后执行S1502，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S1504，此时，示例性的，TX UE可以向RX UE发送第一信息或者自行重新确定资源配配置信息。或者，TX UE所属的基站可以为TX UE配置第一资源配置信息，那么，TX UE在通过S1501收到来自RX UE的第一DRX配置信息后执行S1502，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S1504，此时，示例性的，TX UE可以向RX UE发送第一信息和/或向TX UE自身所属基站发送第二信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述S1504可以且不限于包括以下几种具体实施方式：
第一种：TX UE向RX UE发送第一信息。
具体实施方式一：在RX UE为TX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，TX UE向RX UE发送DRX配置失败信息(如第一信息)，以请求为TX UE配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
具体实施方式二：在RX UE所属的基站为TX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，TX UE向RX UE发送DRX配置失败信息(如第一信息)，然后，RX UE向自身所属的基站发送第四信息，以向RX UE所属的基站指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败，使得基站在接收DRX配置失败信息到后，可以根据第四信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息为第一侧链路配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
这里，第四信息可以为上述DRX配置失败信息，即RX UE向自身所属的基站转发DRX配置失败信息，或者，第四信息还可以包括RX UE基于DRX配置失败信息生成的指示信息，以指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败。
上述DRX配置失败信息或者第四信息可以包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置失败的第三信息(如表示失败原因为SL DRX配置冲突的信息)、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、不允许RX UE为TX UE配置DRX的有效时长、第一资源配置信息(可以理解为发生冲突的资源配置信息)、期望的DRX配置信息(可以理解为建议的DRX配置信息，期望的DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参数)、DRX调整量以及对应的标识信息。当然，DRX配置失败信息还可以包括其他信息，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
在本申请实施例中，上述DRX配置失败信息可以为PC5 RRC重配失败消息，其中，DRX配置失败信息可以携带在PC5 RRC消息、PC5 MAC CE、SCI承载等中；上述第四信息可以为sidelink UE information消息、SL failure information消息或SL DRX 配置失败指示信息；其中，第四信息可以携带在RRC消息、MAC CE、PUCCH承载等中。
第二种，TX UE向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式三：TX UE向自身所属的基站发送模式切换请求信息(即第二信息)，以请求基站将TX UE的资源分配模式由第一模式切换至第二模式，并按照第二模式为第一通信设备配置或者重新配置资源。这里，第一模式可以为mode1，也可以为mode2。相应的，当第一模式为mode1时，第二模式为mode2；或者，当第一模式为mode2时，第二模式为mode1。
例如，TX UE当前处于mode1，那么，TX UE向自身所属的基站发送模式切换请求信息，基站响应模式切换请求信息，将TX UE的资源分配模式由mode1切换至mode2，然后，按照mode2为TX UE重新分配资源，TX UE就可以接收到基站发送的新的资源配置信息。或者，TX UE当前处于mode2，那么，TX UE向自身所属的基站发送模式切换请求信息，基站响应模式切换请求信息，将TX UE的资源分配模式由mode2切换至mode1，然后，按照mode1为TX UE重新分配资源，TX UE就可以接收到基站发送的新的资源配置信息。
具体实施方式四：TX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，以请求基站为TX UE配置或者重新配置资源；
其中，上述资源配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一DRX配置信息、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息(可以理解为建议的资源配置信息)或资源调整量。
第三种，TX UE向RX UE发送第一信息，也向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式五：TX UE可以先向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，基站在收到资源配置请求信息后，根据资源配置请求信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息尝试为TX UE重新配置匹配的资源，那么，如果基站能够提供匹配的资源，则基站可以向TX UE发送新的资源配置信息，以指示重配的资源；否则，基站向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息，TX UE再向RX UE发送DRX配置失败信息；
具体实施方式六：TX UE可以先向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，并在向基站发送资源配置请求信息时启动一定时器，若该定时器超时时TX UE还未收到基站为第二侧链路重新配置的资源配置信息，则TX UE向RX UE发送DRX配置失败信息。
进一步地，在RX UE所属的基站为TX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，RX UE还可以向自身所属的基站发送第四信息，以向RX UE所属的基站指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败，使得基站在接收DRX配置失败信息到后，可以根据第四信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息为第一侧链路配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
具体实施方式七：TX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，并向RX UE发送DRX配置失败信息。可选的。在资源配置请求信息中携带有期望的资源配置信息和/或资源调整量；在DRX配置失败信息中携带有期望的DRX配置信息和/或DRX调整量。
需要说明的是，上述具体实施方式中的DRX配置信息对应的标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、MAC PDU标识、TB标识。
示例性地，上述源标识可以为源层1标识(source L1 ID)或源层2标识(source L2 ID)，上述目标标识可以为目标层1标识(source L1 ID)或目标层2标识(source L2 ID)。
在一些可能的实施例中，如果TX UE的节能需求较大，优选具体实施方式三至六。
第二种情况，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为TX UE，第三通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)。图17为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第二种场景示意图，参见图17所示，TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，RX UE或者RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息。其中，第一DRX配置信息用于RX UE与TX UE之间的第一侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于指示mode2中RX UE对应的接收资源，该接收资源用于第一侧链路。
可以理解的，在第二种情况中，RX UE可以自己确定第一资源配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S1501收到来自TX UE的第一DRX配置信息后执行S1502，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S1504，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向TX UE发送第一信息或者自行重新确定资源配配置信息。或者，RX UE所属的基站可以为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S1501收到来自TX UE的第一DRX配置信息后执行S1502，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S1504，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向TX UE发送第一信息和/或向RX UE自身所属基站发送第二信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述S1504可以且不限于包括以下几种具体实施方式：
第一种：RX UE向TX UE发送第一信息。
具体实施方式一：在TX UE为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，RX UE向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息(如第一信息)，以请求TX UE配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
具体实施方式二：在TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，RX UE向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息(如第一信息)，然后，TX UE向自身所属的基站发送第四信息，以向TX UE所属的基站指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败，使得基站在接收DRX配置失败信息到后，可以根据第四信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息为第一侧链路配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
上述DRX配置失败信息或者第四信息可以包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置失败的第三信息(如表示失败原因为SL DRX配置冲突的信息)、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、不允许TX UE为RX UE配置DRX的有效时长、第一资源配置信息(可以理解为发生冲突的资源配置信息)、期望的DRX配置信息(可以理解为建议的DRX配置信息，期望的DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参 数)、DRX调整量以及对应的标识信息。当然，DRX配置失败信息还可以包括其他信息，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
第二种，RX UE向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式三：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送模式切换请求信息(即第二信息)，以请求基站将RX UE的资源分配模式由第一模式切换至第二模式，并按照第二模式为第一通信设备配置或者重新配置资源。例如，RX UE当前处于mode2，那么，RX UE向自身所属的基站发送模式切换请求信息，基站响应模式切换请求信息，将RX UE的资源分配模式由mode2切换至mode1，然后，按照mode1为RX UE重新分配资源，RX UE就可以接收到基站发送的新的资源配置信息。
具体实施方式四：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，以请求基站为RX UE配置或者重新配置资源；
其中，上述资源配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一DRX配置信息、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息(可以理解为建议的资源配置信息)或资源调整量。
第三种，RX UE向TX UE发送第一信息，也向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式五：RX UE可以先向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，基站在收到资源配置请求信息后，根据资源配置请求信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息尝试为RX UE重新配置匹配的资源，那么，如果基站能够提供匹配的资源，则基站可以向RX UE发送新的资源配置信息，以指示重配的资源；否则，基站向RX UE发送DRX配置失败信息，RX UE再向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息；
具体实施方式六：RX UE可以先向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，并在向基站发送资源配置请求信息时启动一定时器，若该定时器超时时RX UE还未收到基站为第二侧链路重新配置的资源配置信息，则RX UE向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息。
进一步地，在TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，TX UE还可以向自身所属的基站发送第四信息，以向TX UE所属的基站指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败，使得基站在接收DRX配置失败信息到后，可以根据第四信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息为第一侧链路配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
具体实施方式七：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，并向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息。可选的。在资源配置请求信息中携带有期望的资源配置信息和/或资源调整量；在DRX配置失败信息中携带有期望的DRX配置信息和/或DRX调整量。
需要说明的是，上述具体实施方式中的DRX配置信息对应的标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、MAC PDU标识、TB标识。示例性地，上述源标识可以为源层1标识(source L1 ID)或源层2标识(source L2 ID)，上述目标标识可以为目标层1标识(source L1 ID)或目标层2标识(source L2 ID)。
第三种情况，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE或者RX UE所属的 网络设备(如基站)，第三通信设备为TX UE。图18为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第三种场景示意图，参见图18所示，RX UE或者RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息。其中，第一资源配置信息可以包括用于指示所述第一通信设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述RX UE可以替换为“辅助UE”，TX UE可以替换为“被辅助UE”。那么，上述第一资源配置信息可以为辅助配置信息(如包括用于指示RX UE进行sensing的资源配置信息)。被辅助UE向辅助UE发送辅助配置信息，辅助UE可以根据辅助配置信息向被辅助UE发送辅助信息(如一个或者多个资源集合)。
可以理解的，上述辅助UE可以用于辅助被辅助UE确定资源配置信息，被辅助UE确定的资源配置信息可以用于被辅助UE对应的侧链路。
在一些可能的实施方式中，在中继场景中，上述辅助UE可以理解为中继(delay)UE，被辅助UE可以理解为远程(remote)UE。中继UE可以辅助远程UE确定资源配置信息。
进一步地，RX UE的资源分配模式可以为UE自主选择资源，如前述实施例中的mode2或者增强的mode2。示例性的，增强的mode2可以包括基于UE(间)辅助的mode2、基于UE(间)协作的mode2、mode2b等。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例中所述的感知(sensing)可以包括采用UE自主资源分配(如mode 2、mode4及相关增强方法)时的sensing，也可仅指sensing中的部分行为(如监听SCI)。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述S1504可以且不限于包括以下几种具体实施方式：
第一种：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送第一信息。
具体实施方式一：在RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，RX UE向自身所属的基站发送DRX配置失败信息(如第一信息)以请求基站在接收DRX配置失败信息到后，为第一侧链路配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
上述DRX配置失败信息可以为sidelink UE information消息、SL failure information消息或SL DRX配置失败指示信息；其中，DRX配置失败信息可以携带在RRC消息、MAC CE、PUCCH承载等中。
上述DRX配置失败信息可以包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置失败的第三信息(如表示失败原因为SL DRX配置冲突的信息)、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、不允许TX UE为RX UE配置DRX的有效时长、第一资源配置信息(可以理解为发生冲突的资源配置信息)、期望的DRX配置信息(可以理解为建议的DRX配置信息，期望的DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参数)、DRX调整量以及对应的标识信息。当然，DRX配置失败信息还可以包括其他信息，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
第二种，RX UE向TX UE发送第二信息；
具体实施方式二：RX UE向TX UE发送模式切换请求信息(即第二信息)，以请求TX UE将RX UE的资源分配模式由第一模式切换至第二模式，并按照第二模式为第一通信设备配置或者重新配置资源。例如，RX UE当前处于mode2，那么，RX UE向TX UE发送模式切换请求信息，TX UE响应模式切换请求信息，将RX UE的资源分配模式由mode2切换至mode1，然后，按照mode1为RX UE重新分配资源，RX UE就可以接收到TX UE发送的新的资源配置信息。
具体实施方式三：RX UE向TX UE发送资源配置请求信息，以请求TX UE为RX UE配置或者重新配置资源；
其中，上述资源配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一DRX配置信息、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息(可以理解为建议的资源配置信息)或资源调整量。
第三种，RX UE向自身所属基站发送第一信息，也向TX UE发送第二信息；
具体实施方式四：RX UE可以先向TX UE发送资源配置请求信息，TX UE在收到资源配置请求信息后，根据资源配置请求信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息尝试为RX UE重新配置匹配的资源，那么，如果TX UE能够提供匹配的资源，则TX UE可以向RX UE发送新的资源配置信息，以指示重配的资源；否则，TX UE向RX UE发送DRX配置失败信息，RX UE再向自身所属的基站发送DRX配置失败信息；
具体实施方式五：RX UE可以先向TX UE发送资源配置请求信息，并在向TX UE发送资源配置请求信息时启动一定时器，若该定时器超时时RX UE还未收到TX UE为第二侧链路重新配置的资源配置信息，则RX UE向自身所属的基站发送DRX配置失败信息。
进一步地，在TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息的情况下，TX UE还可以向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息(如第四信息)，以向TX UE所属的基站指示为第一侧链路进行资源重配，使得基站在接收资源配置请求信息到后，为第一侧链路配置或者重新配置资源配置信息。
具体实施方式六：RX UE向TX UE发送资源配置请求信息，并向自身所属的基站发送DRX配置失败信息。可选的。在资源配置请求信息中携带有期望的DRX配置信息和/或DRX调整量；在DRX配置失败信息中携带有期望的资源配置信息和/或资源调整量。
需要说明的是，上述具体实施方式中的DRX配置信息对应的标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、MAC PDU标识、TB标识。
示例性地，上述源标识可以为源层1标识(source L1 ID)或源层2标识(source L2 ID)，上述目标标识可以为目标层1标识(source L1 ID)或目标层2标识(source L2 ID)。
第四种情况，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为TX UE，第三通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)。图19为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第四种场景示意图，参见图19所示，TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，RX UE或者RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息。其 中，第一DRX配置资源用于RX UE与TX UE之间的第一侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于RX UE作为TX UE与其他UE(即第四通信设备)之间的第二侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于指示RX UE在第二侧链路上发送侧链路数据，也可以理解为第一资源配置信息用于RX UE(作为TX UE)向其他UE(即第四通信设备)发送侧链路数据。
可以理解的，在第四种情况中，RX UE可以自己确定第一资源配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S1501收到来自TX UE的第一DRX配置信息后执行S1502，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S1504，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向TX UE发送第一信息或者自行重新确定资源配置信息。或者，RX UE所属的基站可以为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S1501收到来自TX UE的第一DRX配置信息后执行S1502，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S1504，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向TX UE发送第一信息和/或向RX UE自身所属基站发送第二信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述S1504可以且不限于包括以下几种具体实施方式：
第一种：RX UE向TX UE发送第一信息。
具体实施方式一：在TX UE为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，RX UE向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息(如第一信息)，以请求为TX UE配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
具体实施方式二：在TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，RX UE向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息(如第一信息)，然后，TX UE向自身所属的基站发送第四信息，以向TX UE所属的基站指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败，使得基站在接收DRX配置失败信息到后，可以根据第四信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息为第一侧链路配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
上述DRX配置失败信息可以包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置失败的第三信息(如表示失败原因为SL DRX配置冲突的信息)、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、不允许TX UE为RX UE配置DRX的有效时长、第一资源配置信息(可以理解为发生冲突的资源配置信息)、期望的DRX配置信息(可以理解为建议的DRX配置信息，期望的DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参数)、DRX调整量以及对应的标识信息。当然，DRX配置失败信息还可以包括其他信息，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
第二种，RX UE向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式三：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送模式切换请求信息(即第二信息)，以请求基站将RX UE的资源分配模式由第一模式切换至第二模式，并按照第二模式为第一通信设备配置或者重新配置资源。例如，RX UE当前处于mode2，那么，RX UE向自身所属的基站发送模式切换请求信息，基站响应模式切换请求信息，将RX UE的资源分配模式由mode2切换至mode1，然后，按照mode1为RX UE重新分配资源，RX UE就可以接收到基站发送的新的资源配置信息。
具体实施方式四：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，以请求基站 为RX UE配置或者重新配置资源；
其中，上述资源配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一DRX配置信息、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息(可以理解为建议的资源配置信息)或资源调整量。
第三种，RX UE向TX UE发送第一信息，也向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式五：RX UE可以先向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，基站在收到资源配置请求信息后，根据资源配置请求信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息尝试为RX UE重新配置匹配的资源，那么，如果基站能够提供匹配的资源，则基站可以向RX UE发送新的资源配置信息，以指示重配的资源；否则，基站向RX UE发送DRX配置失败信息，RX UE再向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息；
具体实施方式六：RX UE可以先向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，并在向基站发送资源配置请求信息时启动一定时器，若该定时器超时时RX UE还未收到基站为第二侧链路重新配置的资源配置信息，则RX UE向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息。
进一步地，在TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，TX UE还可以向自身所属的基站发送第四信息，以向TX UE所属的基站指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败，使得基站在接收DRX配置失败信息到后，可以根据第四信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息为第一侧链路配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
具体实施方式七：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，并向TX UE发送DRX配置失败信息。可选的。在资源配置请求信息中携带有期望的资源配置信息和/或资源调整量；在DRX配置失败信息中携带有期望的DRX配置信息和/或DRX调整量。
需要说明的是，上述具体实施方式中的DRX配置信息对应的标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、MAC PDU标识、TB标识。示例性地，上述源标识可以为源层1标识(source L1 ID)或源层2标识(source L2 ID)，上述目标标识可以为目标层1标识(source L1 ID)或目标层2标识(source L2 ID)。
第五种情况，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE或者RX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)，第三通信设备为TX UE。图20为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第五种场景示意图，参见图20所示，RX UE或者RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息；其中，第一资源配置信息用于指示RX UE对应的一个或者多个资源集合。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述RX UE可以替换为“被辅助UE”、“被调度UE”或者“成员UE”；TX UE可以替换为“辅助UE”、“调度UE”或者“头UE”。那么，上述第一资源配置信息可以为辅助信息，用于指示一个或者多个资源集合。被辅助UE向辅助UE发送辅助配置信息，辅助UE可以根据辅助配置信息向被辅助UE发送辅助信息。
进一步地，RX UE的资源分配模式可以为UE自主选择资源，如前述实施例中所 述的mode2)或者增强的mode2。示例性地，增强的mode2可以包括基于UE(间)辅助的mode2、基于UE(间)协作的mode2、mode2d等。
可以理解的，上述辅助UE可以用于辅助被辅助UE确定资源配置信息，被辅助UE确定的资源配置信息可以用于被辅助UE对应的侧链路。
在一些可能的实施方式中，在中继场景中，上述辅助UE可以理解为中继(delay)UE，被辅助UE可以理解为远程(remote)UE。中继UE可以辅助远程UE确定资源配置信息，例如，中继UE将基站配置的第一资源配置信息发送给远程UE。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述S1504可以且不限于包括以下几种具体实施方式：
第一种：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送第一信息。
具体实施方式一：在RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，RX UE向自身所属的基站发送DRX配置失败信息(如第一信息)，以请求基站在接收DRX配置失败信息到后，为第一侧链路配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
在实际应用中，上述DRX配置失败信息可以为sidelink UE information消息、SL failure information消息或SL DRX配置失败指示信息，其中，SL DRX配置失败指示信息可以携带在通过RRC消息、MAC CE、SCI等中。
上述DRX配置失败信息可以包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置失败的第三信息(如表示失败原因为SL DRX配置冲突的信息)、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、不允许TX UE为RX UE配置DRX的有效时长、第一资源配置信息(可以理解为发生冲突的资源配置信息)、期望的DRX配置信息(可以理解为建议的DRX配置信息，期望的DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参数)、DRX调整量以及对应的标识信息。当然，DRX配置失败信息还可以包括其他信息，本申请实施例不做具体限定。
第二种，RX UE向TX UE发送第二信息；
具体实施方式二：RX UE向TX UE发送模式切换请求信息(即第二信息)，以请求TX UE将RX UE的资源分配模式由第一模式切换至第二模式，并按照第二模式为第一通信设备配置或者重新配置资源。例如，RX UE当前处于mode2，那么，RX UE向TX UE发送模式切换请求信息，TX UE响应模式切换请求信息，将RX UE的资源分配模式由mode2切换至mode1，然后，按照mode1为RX UE重新分配资源，RX UE就可以接收到TX UE发送的新的资源配置信息。
具体实施方式三：RX UE向TX UE发送资源配置请求信息，以请求TX UE为RX UE配置或者重新配置资源；
其中，上述资源配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一DRX配置信息、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息(可以理解为建议的资源配置信息)或资源调整量。
第三种，RX UE向自身所属基站发送第一信息，也向TX UE发送第二信息；
具体实施方式四：RX UE可以先向TX UE发送资源配置请求信息，TX UE在收到资源配置请求信息后，根据资源配置请求信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息尝试为RX  UE重新配置匹配的资源，那么，如果TX UE能够提供匹配的资源，则TX UE可以向RX UE发送新的资源配置信息，以指示重配的资源；否则，TX UE向RX UE发送DRX配置失败信息，RX UE再向自身所属的基站发送DRX配置失败信息；
具体实施方式五：RX UE可以先向TX UE发送资源配置请求信息，并在向TX UE发送资源配置请求信息时启动一定时器，若该定时器超时时RX UE还未收到TX UE为第二侧链路重新配置的资源配置信息，则RX UE向自身所属的基站发送DRX配置失败信息。
进一步地，在TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息的情况下，TX UE还可以向自身所属的基站发送资源配置请求信息，以向TX UE所属的基站指示为第一侧链路进行资源重配，使得基站在接收资源配置请求信息到后，为第一侧链路配置或者重新配置资源配置信息。
具体实施方式六：RX UE向TX UE发送资源配置请求信息，并向自身所属的基站发送DRX配置失败信息。可选的。在资源配置请求信息中携带有期望的资源配置信息和/或资源调整量；在DRX配置失败信息中携带有期望的DRX配置信息和/或DRX调整量。
需要说明的是，上述具体实施方式中的DRX配置信息对应的标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、MAC PDU标识、TB标识。示例性地，上述源标识可以为源层1标识(source L1 ID)或源层2标识(source L2 ID)，上述目标标识可以为目标层1标识(source L1 ID)或目标层2标识(source L2 ID)。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述第一资源配置信息可以为第一通信设备收到的资源配置信息，第一DRX配置信息可以为第一通信设备当前的DRX配置信息。那么，图21为本申请实施例中的第一通信设备侧通信方法的第五流程示意图，参见图21中实线所示，该方法包括：
S2101：第一通信设备接收来自第三通信设备的第一资源配置信息；
这里，第一通信设备接收第三通信设备为第二侧链路配置的第一资源配置信息。
S2102：第一通信设备判断第一资源配置信息与第一DRX配置信息是否匹配；若是，流程结束，若否，执行S2104；
其中，第一DRX配置信息可以为第一通信设备当前的DRX配置信息。
这里，第一通信设备在通过S2101接收到第一资源配置信息之后，判断第一资源配置信息与第一通信设备当前的DRX配置信息(即第一DRX配置信息)是否匹配。
示例性地，参见图21中虚线所示，在S2101之前，上述方法还可以包括：S2103：第一通信设备接收来自第二通信设备的第一DRX配置信息。
这里，第一通信设备接收第二通信设备为第一侧链路配置的第一DRX配置信息，然后，第一通信设备可以按照第一DRX配置信息进行非连续接收。此时，第一DRX配置信息可以理解为第一通信设备当前的DRX配置信息。
S2104：第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一信息，和/或第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送第二信息。
在本申请实施例中，第一通信设备在判断资源配置信息与当前的DRX配置信息不 匹配的时候，可以向第二通信设备请求进行DRX配置，和/或向第三通信设备请求进行资源配置，使得DRX配置信息与资源配置信息相匹配。
下面以具体场景为例，对上述通信方法进行说明。
第六种情况，第一通信设备为TX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE，第三通信设备为TX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)。图22为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第六种场景示意图，参见图22所示，TX UE、RX UE或者RX UE所属的基站为TX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，TX UE所属的基站为TX UE配置第一资源配置信息。其中，第一资源配置信息可以用于指示mode1中基站为TX UE配置的资源，也可以用于指示mode2中TX UE对应的资源池。
可以理解的，在第六种情况中，TX UE可以自己确定第一DRX配置信息，那么，TX UE在通过S2101收到来自TX UE所属的基站的第一资源配置信息后执行S2102，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S2104，此时，示例性的，TX UE可以向TX UE所属的基站发送第二信息或者自行重新确定DRX配置信息。或者，RX UE或者RX UE所属的基站可以为TX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，那么，TX UE在通过S2101收到来自TX UE所属的基站的第一资源配置信息后执行S2102，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S2104，此时，示例性的，TX UE可以向RX UE发送第一信息和/或向TX UE自身所属基站发送第二信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述S2104可以且不限于包括以下几种具体实施方式：
第一种：TX UE向RX UE发送第一信息。
具体实施方式一：在RX UE或者RX UE所属的基站为TX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，TX UE向RX UE发送DRX配置请求信息(如第一信息)，以请求为TX UE配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
其中，上述DRX配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一资源配置信息、第一资源配置信息对应的标识信息、第一DRX配置信息以及第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息。
在实际应用中，上述DRX配置请求信息可以为PC5 RRC重配失败消息，其中，DRX配置请求信息可以携带在PC5 RRC消息、PC5 MAC CE、SCI承载等中。
第二种，TX UE向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式二：TX UE向自身所属的基站发送模式切换请求信息(即第二信息)，以请求基站将TX UE的资源分配模式由第一模式切换至第二模式，并按照第二模式为第一通信设备配置或者重新配置资源。例如，TX UE当前处于mode2，那么，TX UE向自身所属的基站发送模式切换请求信息，基站响应模式切换请求信息，将TX UE的资源分配模式由mode2切换至mode1，然后，按照mode1为TX UE重新分配资源，TX UE就可以接收到基站发送的新的资源配置信息。或者，TX UE当前处于mode1，那么，TX UE向自身所属的基站发送模式切换请求信息，基站响应模式切换请求信息，将TX UE的资源分配模式由mode1切换至mode2，然后，按照mode2为TX UE重新分配资源，TX UE就可以接收到基站发送的新的资源配置信息。
具体实施方式三：TX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置失败信息，以请求基站 为TX UE配置或者重新配置资源；
其中，上述资源配置失败信息可以包括以下至少一种：用于表示资源配置失败的第四信息，用于表示资源配置信息与DRX配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、第一DRX配置信息(第一DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参数)、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息(可以理解为建议的资源配置信息)或资源调整量。
第三种，TX UE向RX UE发送第一信息，也向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式四：TX UE可以先向自身所属的基站发送资源配置失败信息，基站在收到资源配置失败信息后，根据资源配置失败信息中携带的第一DRX配置信息尝试为TX UE重新配置匹配的资源，那么，如果基站能够提供匹配的资源，则基站可以向TX UE发送新的资源配置信息，以指示重配的资源；否则，基站向TX UE发送资源配置失败信息，TX UE再向RX UE发送DRX配置请求信息；
具体实施方式五：TX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置失败信息，并向RX UE发送DRX配置请求信息。可选的，在资源配置失败信息中携带有期望的资源配置信息和/或资源调整量；在DRX配置请求信息中携带有期望的DRX配置信息和/或DRX调整量。
需要说明的是，上述具体实施方式中的DRX配置信息对应的标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、MAC PDU标识、TB标识。
示例性地，上述源标识可以为源层1标识(source L1 ID)或源层2标识(source L2 ID)，上述目标标识可以为目标层1标识(source L1 ID)或目标层2标识(source L2 ID)。
第七种情况，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备(如基站，第三通信设备为TX UE。图23为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第七种场景示意图，参见图23所示，RX UE、TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息。其中，第一资源配置信息用于指示mode2中RX UE对应的接收资源。
可以理解的，在第七种情况中，RX UE可以自己确定第一DRX配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S2101收到来自RX UE所属的基站的第一资源配置信息后执行S2102，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S2104，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向RX UE所属的基站发送第二信息或者自行重新确定DRX配置信息。或者，TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站可以为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S2101收到来自RX UE所属的基站的第一资源配置信息后执行S2102，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S2104，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向TX UE发送第一信息和/或向RX UE自身所属基站发送第二信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述S2104可以且不限于包括以下几种具体实施方式：
第一种：RX UE向TX UE发送第一信息。
具体实施方式一：在TX UE或TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息 的情况下，RX UE向TX UE发送DRX配置请求信息(如第一信息)，以请求为TX UE配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
其中，上述DRX配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一资源配置信息、第一资源配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的DRX配置信息以及DRX调整量。
第二种，RX UE向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式二：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置失败信息，以请求基站为TX UE配置或者重新配置资源；
其中，上述资源配置失败信息可以包括以下至少一种：用于表示资源配置失败的第五信息，用于表示资源配置信息与DRX配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、第一DRX配置信息(第一DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参数)、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息(可以理解为建议的资源配置信息)或资源调整量。
第三种，RX UE向TX UE发送第一信息，也向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式三：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置失败信息，并向TX UE发送DRX配置请求信息。可选的，在资源配置失败信息中携带有期望的资源配置信息和/或资源调整量；在DRX配置请求信息中携带有期望的DRX配置信息和/或DRX调整量。
需要说明的是，上述具体实施方式中的DRX配置信息对应的标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、MAC PDU标识、TB标识。示例性地，上述源标识可以为源层1标识(source L1 ID)或源层2标识(source L2 ID)，上述目标标识可以为目标层1标识(source L1 ID)或目标层2标识(source L2 ID)。
第八种情况，与上述第三种情况的场景类似，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)，第三通信设备为TX UE。图24为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第八种场景示意图，参见图24所示，RX UE或者RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息。其中，第一资源配置信息可以包括用于指示RX UE进行感知的资源配置信息。
可以理解的，在第八种情况中，RX UE可以自己确定第一DRX配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S2101收到来自TX UE的第一资源配置信息(包括用于指示RX UE进行感知的资源配置信息)后执行S2102，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S2104，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向TX UE发送第二信息或者自行重新确定DRX配置信息。或者，RX UE所属的基站可以为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S2101收到来自TX UE的第一资源配置信息后执行S2102，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S2104，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向RX UE所属的基站发送第一信息和/或向TX UE发送第二信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述S2104可以且不限于包括以下几种具体实施方式：
第一种：TX UE向RX UE发送第一信息。
具体实施方式一：在RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，RX UE向RX UE所属的基站发送DRX配置请求信息(如第一信息)，以请求为基站配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
其中，上述DRX配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一资源配置信息、第一资源配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的DRX配置信息以及DRX调整量。
第二种，RX UE向TX UE发送第二信息；
具体实施方式二：RX UE向TX UE发送模式切换请求信息(即第二信息)，以请求TX UE将RX UE的资源分配模式由第一模式切换至第二模式，并按照第二模式为第一通信设备配置或者重新配置资源。例如，RX UE当前处于mode2，那么，RX UE向TX UE发送模式切换请求信息，TX UE响应模式切换请求信息，将RX UE的资源分配模式由mode2切换至mode1，然后，按照mode1为RX UE重新分配资源，RX UE就可以接收到基站发送的新的资源配置信息。
具体实施方式三：RX UE向TX UE发送资源配置失败信息，以请求TX UE为RX UE配置或者重新配置资源；
其中，上述资源配置失败信息可以包括以下至少一种：用于表示资源配置失败的第五信息，用于表示资源配置信息与DRX配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、第一DRX配置信息(第一DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参数)、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息(可以理解为建议的资源配置信息)或资源调整量。
第三种，RX UE向自身所属的基站发送第一信息，也向TX UE发送第二信息；
具体实施方式四：RX UE向TX UE发送资源配置失败信息，并向RX UE所属的基站发送DRX配置请求信息。可选的，在资源配置失败信息中携带有期望的资源配置信息和/或资源调整量；在DRX配置请求信息中携带有期望的DRX配置信息和/或DRX调整量。
需要说明的是，上述具体实施方式中的DRX配置信息对应的标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标对标识、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、MAC PDU标识、TB标识。示例性地，上述源标识可以为源层1标识(source L1 ID)或源层2标识(source L2 ID)，上述目标标识可以为目标层1标识(source L1 ID)或目标层2标识(source L2 ID)。
第九种情况，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为TX UE，第三通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)。图25为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第就种场景示意图，参见图25所示，RX UE、TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一资源配置信息。其中，第一DRX配置资源用于RX UE与TX UE之间的第一侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于RX UE作为TX UE与其他UE(即第四通信设备)之间的第二侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于指示RX UE在该第二侧链路上发送侧链路数据，也可以理解为第一资源配置信息用于RX UE(作为TX UE)向其他UE(即第四通信设备)发送侧链路数据。
可以理解的，在第九种情况中，RX UE可以自己确定第一DRX配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S2101收到来自RX UE所属的基站的第一资源配置信息后执行S2102，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S2104，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向RX UE所属基站发送第二信息或者自行重新确定DRX配置信息。或者，TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站可以为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S2101收到来自RX UE所属的基站的第一资源配置信息后执行S2102，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S2104，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向TX UE发送第一信息和/或向RX UE所属基站发送第二信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述S2104可以且不限于包括以下几种具体实施方式：
第一种：RX UE向TX UE发送第一信息。
具体实施方式一：在TX UE或者TX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，RX UE向TX UE发送DRX配置请求信息(如第一信息)，以请求为TX UE或者TX所属的基站配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
其中，上述DRX配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一资源配置信息、第一资源配置信息对应的标识信息、第一DRX配置信息以及第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息。
第二种，RX UE向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式二：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置失败信息(如第二信息)，以请求基站为RX UE配置或者重新配置资源；
其中，上述资源配置失败信息可以包括以下至少一种：用于表示资源配置失败的第五信息，用于表示资源配置信息与DRX配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、第一DRX配置信息(第一DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参数)、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息(可以理解为建议的资源配置信息)或资源调整量。
第三种，RX UE向TX UE发送第一信息，也向自身所属基站发送第二信息；
具体实施方式三：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送资源配置失败信息，并向TX UE发送DRX配置请求信息。可选的，在资源配置失败信息中携带有期望的资源配置信息和/或资源调整量；在DRX配置请求信息中携带有期望的DRX配置信息和/或DRX调整量。
需要说明的是，上述具体实施方式中的DRX配置信息对应的标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、MAC PDU标识、TB标识。示例性地，上述源标识可以为源层1标识(source L1 ID)或源层2标识(source L2 ID)，上述目标标识可以为目标层1标识(source L1 ID)或目标层2标识(source L2 ID)。
第十种情况，与上述第五种情况类似，第一通信设备为TX UE，第二通信设备为TX UE所属的网络设备(如基站)，第三通信设备为TX UE或者RX UE。图26为本申请实施例中的资源配置和DRX配置的第十种场景示意图，参见图26所示，RX UE或RX UE所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，TX UE或TX UE所属的基站为 RX UE配置第一资源配置信息。其中，第一资源配置信息用于指示RX UE对应的一个或者多个资源集合。
可以理解的，在第十种情况中，RX UE可以自己确定第一DRX配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S2101收到来自TX UE的第一资源配置信息后执行S2102，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S2104，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向TX UE发送第二信息或者自行重新确定DRX配置信息。或者，RX UE所属的基站可以为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息，那么，RX UE在通过S2101收到来自TX UE的第一资源配置信息后执行S2102，进而当第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配时执行S2104，此时，示例性的，RX UE可以向RX UE所属的基站发送第一信息和/或向TX UE发送第二信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述S2104可以且不限于包括以下几种具体实施方式：
第一种：RX UE向自身所属的基站发送第一信息。
具体实施方式一：在RX UE自身所属的基站为RX UE配置第一DRX配置信息的情况下，RX UE向基站发送DRX配置请求信息(如第一信息)，以请求为RX UE配置或者重新配置DRX配置信息。
其中，上述DRX配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一资源配置信息、第一资源配置信息对应的标识信息、第一DRX配置信息(第一DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参数)以及第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息。
第二种，RX UE向TX UE发送第二信息；
具体实施方式二：RX UE向TX UE发送模式切换请求信息(如第二信息)，以请求TX UE将RX UE的资源分配模式由第一模式切换至第二模式，并按照第二模式为第一通信设备配置或者重新配置资源。例如，RX UE当前处于mode2，那么，RX UE向TX UE发送模式切换请求信息，TX UE响应模式切换请求信息，将RX UE的资源分配模式由mode2切换至mode1，然后，按照mode1为RX UE重新分配资源，RX UE就可以接收到基站发送的新的资源配置信息。
具体实施方式三：RX UE向TX UE发送资源配置失败信息，以请求TX UE为RX UE配置或者重新配置资源；
其中，上述资源配置失败信息可以包括以下至少一种：用于表示资源配置失败的第四信息，用于表示资源配置信息与DRX配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、第一DRX配置信息(第一DRX配置信息可以包括如DRX激活时段等部分DRX参数或者包括全部DRX参数)、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息(可以理解为建议的资源配置信息)或资源调整量。
第三种，RX UE向自身所属的基站发送第一信息，也向TX UE发送第二信息；
具体实施方式四：RX UE向TX UE发送资源配置失败信息，并向自身所属的基站发送DRX配置请求信息。可选的，在资源配置失败信息中携带有期望的资源配置信息和/或资源调整量；在DRX配置请求信息中携带有期望的DRX配置信息和/或DRX调整量。
需要说明的是，上述具体实施方式中的DRX配置信息对应的标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、MAC PDU标识、TB标识。示例性地，上述源标识可以为源层1标识(source L1 ID)或源层2标识(source L2 ID)，上述目标标识可以为目标层1标识(source L1 ID)或目标层2标识(source L2 ID)。
由上述可以看出，当第一通信设备判断第一资源配置信息与第一DRX配置信息(即SL资源与SL DRX)不匹配时，向第二通信设备发送第一信息和/或向第三通信设备发送第二信息，以使得第二通信设备和/或第三通信设备配置的SL资源与SL DRX相匹配。
进一步地，当第一通信设备判断SL资源与SL DRX不匹配时，第一通信设备才需将该SL DRX配置发送给SL资源配置主体(基站或UE)，可节省第一通信设备向SL资源配置主体发送其相关SL DRX的信令开销；当第一通信设备判断SL资源与SL DRX不匹配时，第一通信设备才需将该SL资源配置发送给SL DRX配置主体(基站或UE)，可节省第一通信设备向SL DRX配置主体发送其相关SL资源配置的信令开销。
进一步地，当UE判断SL资源与SL DRX不匹配时，向SL DRX配置主体指示不匹配的SL资源配置/建议的SL DRX配置，或者，向SL资源配置主体指示不匹配的SL DRX配置/建议的SL资源配置，或者，向SL DRX配置主体指示建议的SL DRX配置的同时向SL资源配置主体指示建议的SL资源配置，以使得后续重配的SL资源与SL DRX相匹配。
基于相同的发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为第一通信设备中的芯片或者片上系统，还可以为第一通信设备中用于实现上述任一实施例所述方法的功能模块。该芯片或者片上系统包括存储器，存储器中存储有指令，当指令被片上系统或者芯片调用的时候，执行上述方法。图27为本申请实施例中的通信装置的又一种结构示意图，参见图27所示，该通信装置2700可以包括：发送模块2701；还可以包括接收模块2702和/或匹配模块2703。
在一些可能的实施方式中，发送模块2701，用于若第一非连续接收DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配，则向第二通信设备发送第一信息，和/或向第三通信设备发送第二信息。
其中，第一DRX配置信息用于第一通信设备对应的第一侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于第一通信设备对应的第二侧链路，第一信息用于指示第二通信设备为第一侧链路进行DRX配置，第二信息用于指示第三通信设备为第二侧链路进行资源配置。
在一些可能的实现方式中，第一侧链路可以为一条或者多条侧链路，第二侧链路也可以为一条或者多条侧链路。需要注意的是，当第一侧链路为一条侧链路时，第二侧链路与第一侧链路可以为同一侧链路，或者第二侧链路与第一侧链路为不同侧链路，当第一侧链路为多条侧链路时，第二侧链路可以为第一侧链路中的一条或者多条，也就是说，第二侧链路为第一侧链路中的部分侧链路或者全部侧链路。
在一些可能的实现方式中，由于DRX配置信息和资源配置信息是由不同的主体进行配置的，那么，第一DRX配置信息所指示的DRX激活时段与第一资源配置信息所指示的时间区域可能会在一个或者多个时间段内存在冲突，此时，可以称为第一 DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配。
可选的，上述“一个时间段”可以指已发生的时域区间对应的时隙，也可以指未发生的时域区间对应的时隙。
进一步地，上述第一DRX配置信息所指示的DRX激活时段与第一资源配置信息所指示的时域区间在一个时间段内存在冲突，包括：n个DRX激活时段与时域区间重叠的时隙数小于预设阈值，n为正整数。例如，n个DRX激活时段与时域区间重叠的时隙数小于预设阈值，包括：重叠时隙数除以n倍的DRX激活期的时隙数小于预设阈值。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一资源配置信息为第一通信设备当前的资源配置信息；接收模块2702，用于接收来自第二通信设备的第一DRX配置信息；匹配模块2703，用于确定第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为TX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE，第三通信设备为TX UE所属的网络设备；其中，第一资源配置信息可以用于指示mode1中基站为TX UE配置的资源，也可以用于指示mode2中TX UE对应的资源池。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为TX UE，第三通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备；其中，第一DRX配置信息用于RX UE与TX UE之间的第一侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于指示mode2中RX UE对应的接收资源，该接收资源用于第一侧链路。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为RX UE，第三通信设备为TX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备；其中，第一资源配置信息包括用于指示RX UE进行感知的资源配置信息。
进一步地，第一通信设备可以为辅助用户设备，第二通信设备可以为辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备可以为被辅助用户设备；其中，第一资源配置信息包括用于指示第一通信设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为TX UE，第三通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备；其中，第一DRX配置资源用于RX UE与TX UE之间的第一侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于RX UE作为TX UE与其他RX UE之间的第二侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于指示RX UE在第二侧链路上发送侧链路数据，也可以理解为第一资源配置信息用于RX UE(作为TX UE)向其他UE发送侧链路数据。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备，第三通信设备为TX UE；其中，第一DRX配置资源用于RX UE与TX UE之间的第一侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于指示RX UE对应的一个或者多个资源集合。
进一步地，第一通信设备可以为被辅助用户设备，第二通信设备可以为被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备可以为辅助用户设备；其中，第一DRX配置资源用于RX UE与TX UE之间的第一侧链路，第一资源配置信息用于指示RX UE对应的一个或者多个资源集合。
在一些可能的实施方式中，发送模块2701，具体用于向第三通信设备发送模式切换请求信息，模式切换请求信息用于请求第三通信设备将第一通信设备的资源分配模 式由第一模式切换为第二模式；或，向第三通信设备发送资源配置请求信息。
其中，资源配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一DRX配置信息、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息或资源调整量。
在一些可能的实施方式中，发送模块2701，具体用于向第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息。
其中，DRX配置失败信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置失败的第三信息、DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、不允许第二通信设备为第一通信设备配置DRX的有效时长、第一资源配置信息、期望的DRX配置信息、DRX调整量以及对应的标识信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，接收模块2702，还用于接收第三通信设备发送的DRX配置失败信息；发送模块2701，还用于向第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，上述装置2700还包括一定时器，定时器，用于在发送模块2701向第三通信设备发送资源配置请求信息后启动；发送模块2701，还用于当定时器超时且接收模块2702未收到第三通信设备发送的资源配置信息时，向第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，DRX配置失败信息还用于触发第二通信设备向第二通信设备所属的网络设备发送第四信息，第四信息用于指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败。
可以理解的，第四信息可以为上述DRX配置失败信息，即RX UE向自身所属的基站转发DRX配置失败信息，或者，第四信息还可以包括RX UE基于DRX配置失败信息生成的指示信息，以指示第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败。
其中，上述标识信息可以包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU标识、传输块TB标识。
在一些可能的实施方式中，发送模块2701，还用于向第三通信设备发送资源配置请求信息，并向第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一DRX配置信息为第一通信设备当前的DRX配置信息；接收模块2702，还用于接收来自第三通信设备的第一资源配置信息；匹配模块2703，用于确定第一DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为TX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE，第三通信设备为TX UE所属的网络设备；其中，第一资源配置信息可以用于指示mode1中基站为TX UE配置的资源，也可以用于指示mode2中TX UE对应的资源池。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备，第三通信设备为RX UE。其中，第一资源配置信息用于指示mode2中TX UE对应的接收资源。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE的网络设备，第三通信设备为TX UE；其中，第一资源配置信息包括用于指示RX UE进行感知的资源配置信息。
进一步地，第一通信设备可以为被辅助用户设备，第二通信设备可以为被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备可以为辅助用户设备；其中，第一资源配置信息包括用于指示第一通信设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为TX UE，第三通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备；其中，第一资源配置信息用于RX UE在与其他UE之间的第二侧链路上发送侧链路数据，也可以理解为第一资源配置信息用于RX UE(作为TX UE)向其他UE发送侧链路数据。
在一些可能的实施方式中，第一通信设备为RX UE，第二通信设备为RX UE所属的网络设备，第三通信设备为TX UE；其中，第一资源配置信息用于指示RX UE对应的一个或者多个资源集合。
进一步地，第一通信设备为被辅助用户设备，第二通信设备为被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，第三通信设备为辅助用户设备。
在一些可能的实施方式中，发送模块2701，还用于向第三通信设备发送模式切换请求信息，模式切换请求信息用于请求第三通信设备将第一通信设备的资源分配模式由第一模式切换为第二模式并按照第二模式为第一通信设备配置资源；或，向第三通信设备发送资源配置失败信息，其中，资源配置失败信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示资源配置失败的第五信息，用于表示资源配置信息与DRX配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、第一DRX配置信息、第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息或资源调整量。
在一些可能的实施方式中，发送模块2701，还用于向第三通信设备发送DRX配置请求信息。其中，DRX配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、第一资源配置信息、期望的DRX配置或DRX调整量。
在一些可能的实施方式中，发送模块2701，还用于第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送资源配置失败信息，并向第三通信设备发送DRX配置请求信息。
基于相同的发明构思，仍参见图13所示，当第一通信设备中的处理器1301执行存储器1302中存储的可执行代码或应用程序时，可以执行以上实施例中的第一通信设备一侧的方法步骤，具体执行过程参见上述实施例，在此不再赘述。
此外，上述存储器1302中存储有用于实现上述发送模块、接收模块以及匹配模块的功能的计算机执行指令。上述发送模块、接收模块以及匹配模块发送模块、接收模块以及匹配模块的功能/实现过程均可以通过图13中的处理器1301调用存储器1302中存储的计算机执行指令来实现，具体实现过程和功能参考上述相关实施例。
基于相同的发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质，计算机可读存储介质存储有指令，当指令在计算机上运行时，用于执行如一个或者多个实施例所述的通信方法。
基于相同的发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序或计算机程序产品，当计算机程序或计算机程序产品在计算机上被执行时，使得计算机实现如一个或者多个实施例所述的通信方法。
本领域技术人员能够领会，结合本文公开描述的各种说明性逻辑框、模块和算法步 骤所描述的功能可以硬件、软件、固件或其任何组合来实施。如果以软件来实施，那么各种说明性逻辑框、模块、和步骤描述的功能可作为一或多个指令或代码在计算机可读媒体上存储或传输，且由基于硬件的处理单元执行。计算机可读媒体可包含计算机可读存储媒体，其对应于有形媒体，例如数据存储媒体，或包括任何促进将计算机程序从一处传送到另一处的媒体(例如，根据通信协议)的通信媒体。以此方式，计算机可读媒体大体上可对应于(1)非暂时性的有形计算机可读存储媒体，或(2)通信媒体，例如信号或载波。数据存储媒体可为可由一或多个计算机或一或多个处理器存取以检索用于实施本申请中描述的技术的指令、代码和/或数据结构的任何可用媒体。计算机程序产品可包含计算机可读媒体。
作为实例而非限制，此类计算机可读存储媒体可包括RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM或其它光盘存储装置、磁盘存储装置或其它磁性存储装置、快闪存储器或可用来存储指令或数据结构的形式的所要程序代码并且可由计算机存取的任何其它媒体。并且，任何连接被恰当地称作计算机可读媒体。举例来说，如果使用同轴缆线、光纤缆线、双绞线、数字订户线(DSL)或例如红外线、无线电和微波等无线技术从网站、服务器或其它远程源传输指令，那么同轴缆线、光纤缆线、双绞线、DSL或例如红外线、无线电和微波等无线技术包含在媒体的定义中。但是，应理解，所述计算机可读存储媒体和数据存储媒体并不包括连接、载波、信号或其它暂时媒体，而是实际上针对于非暂时性有形存储媒体。如本文中所使用，磁盘和光盘包含压缩光盘(CD)、激光光盘、光学光盘、数字多功能光盘(DVD)和蓝光光盘，其中磁盘通常以磁性方式再现数据，而光盘利用激光以光学方式再现数据。以上各项的组合也应包含在计算机可读媒体的范围内。
可通过例如一或多个数字信号处理器(DSP)、通用微处理器、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程逻辑阵列(FPGA)或其它等效集成或离散逻辑电路等一或多个处理器来执行指令。因此，如本文中所使用的术语“处理器”可指前述结构或适合于实施本文中所描述的技术的任一其它结构中的任一者。另外，在一些方面中，本文中所描述的各种说明性逻辑框、模块、和步骤所描述的功能可以提供于经配置以用于编码和解码的专用硬件和/或软件模块内，或者并入在组合编解码器中。而且，所述技术可完全实施于一或多个电路或逻辑元件中。
本申请的技术可在各种各样的装置或设备中实施，包含无线手持机、集成电路(IC)或一组IC(例如，芯片组)。本申请中描述各种组件、模块或单元是为了强调用于执行所揭示的技术的装置的功能方面，但未必需要由不同硬件单元实现。实际上，如上文所描述，各种单元可结合合适的软件和/或固件组合在编码解码器硬件单元中，或者通过互操作硬件单元(包含如上文所描述的一或多个处理器)来提供。
在上述实施例中，对各个实施例的描述各有侧重，某个实施例中没有详述的部分，可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。
以上所述，仅为本申请示例性的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到的变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应该以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (104)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    若第一非连续接收DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配，则第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一信息，和/或向第三通信设备发送第二信息；
    其中，所述第一DRX配置信息用于所述第一通信设备对应的第一侧链路，所述第一资源配置信息用于所述第一通信设备对应的第二侧链路，所述第一信息用于指示所述第二通信设备为所述第一侧链路进行DRX配置，所述第二信息用于指示所述第三通信设备为所述第二侧链路进行资源配置。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一DRX配置信息与所述第一资源配置信息不匹配，包括：所述第一DRX配置信息所指示的DRX激活时段与所述第一资源配置信息所指示的时域区间在至少一个时间段内存在冲突。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一DRX配置信息所指示的DRX激活时段与所述第一资源配置信息所指示的时域区间在一个时间段内存在冲突，包括：n个所述DRX激活时段与所述时域区间重叠的时隙数小于预设阈值，n为正整数。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述n个所述DRX激活时段与所述时域区间重叠的时隙数小于预设阈值，包括：所述重叠时隙数除以n倍的DRX激活期的时隙数小于所述预设阈值。
  5. 根据权利要求1至4任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一资源配置信息为所述第一通信设备当前的资源配置信息；所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备接收来自所述第二通信设备的所述第一DRX配置信息；
    所述第一通信设备确定所述第一DRX配置信息与所述第一资源配置信息不匹配。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第二通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第三通信设备为所述发送终端设备所属的网络设备。
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第三通信设备为所述接收终端设备所属的网络设备。
  8. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第三通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第二通信设备为所述接收终端设备所属的网络设备；所述第一资源配置信息包括用于指示所述第一通信设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
  9. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为辅助用户设备，所述第二通信设备为所述辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为被辅助用户设备，所述第一资源配置包括用于指示所述第一通信设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
  10. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第三通信设备为所述接收终端设备所属的网络设备；所述第一资源配置信息用于所述第一通信设备在与第四通信设备之间的 第二侧链路上发送侧链路数据。
  11. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为所述接收终端设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为发送终端设备。
  12. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为被辅助用户设备，所述第二通信设备为所述被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为辅助用户设备。
  13. 根据权利要求5至12任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送第二信息，包括：
    所述第一通信设备向所述第三通信设备发送模式切换请求信息，所述模式切换请求信息用于请求所述第三通信设备将所述第一通信设备的资源分配模式由第一模式切换为第二模式；或，
    所述第一通信设备向所述第三通信设备发送资源配置请求信息；其中，所述资源配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、所述第一DRX配置信息、所述第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息或资源调整量。
  14. 根据权利要求5至12任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送第一信息，包括：
    所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息；
    其中，所述DRX配置失败信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置失败的第三信息、所述DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、不允许所述第二通信设备为所述第一通信设备配置DRX的有效时长、所述第一资源配置信息、期望的DRX配置信息、DRX调整量以及对应的标识信息。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息，包括：
    所述第一通信设备接收所述第三通信设备发送的所述DRX配置失败信息；所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送所述DRX配置失败信息；或，
    所述第一通信设备在向所述第三通信设备发送所述资源配置请求信息后启动定时器；当所述定时器超时且所述第一通信设备未收到所述第三通信设备发送的资源配置信息时，所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送所述DRX配置失败信息。
  16. 根据权利要求14或15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述DRX配置失败信息还用于触发所述第二通信设备向所述第二通信设备所属的网络设备发送第四信息，所述第四信息用于指示所述第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败。
  17. 根据权利要求14至16任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述标识信息包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU标识、传输块TB标识。
  18. 根据权利要求5至12任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备向第 二通信设备发送第一信息，和向第三通信设备发送第二信息，包括：
    所述第一通信设备向所述第三通信设备发送资源配置请求信息，并向所述第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息。
  19. 根据权利要求1至4任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一DRX配置信息为所述第一通信设备当前的DRX配置信息；所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备接收来自所述第三通信设备的所述第一资源配置信息；
    所述第一通信设备确定所述第一DRX配置信息与所述第一资源配置信息不匹配。
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第二通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第三通信设备为发送终端设备所属的网络设备。
  21. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第三通信设备为所述接收终端所属的网络设备。
  22. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为所述接收终端设备所述的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为发送终端设备；所述第一资源配置信息包括用于指示所述第一通信设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
  23. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为被辅助用户设备，所述第二通信设备为被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为辅助用户设备，所述第一资源配置信息包括用于指示所述第一通信设备进行感知的资源配置信息。
  24. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第三通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备；所述第一资源配置信息用于所述第一通信设备在与第四通信设备之间的第二侧链路上发送侧链路数据。
  25. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为发送终端设备。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备为被辅助用户设备，所述第二通信设备为所述被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为辅助用户设备。
  27. 根据权利要求19至26任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，第一通信设备向第三通信设备发送第二信息，包括：
    所述第一通信设备向所述第三通信设备发送模式切换请求信息，所述模式切换请求信息用于请求所述第三通信设备将所述第一通信设备的资源分配模式由第一模式切换为第二模式并按照所述第二模式为所述第一通信设备配置资源；或，
    所述第一通信设备向所述第三通信设备发送资源配置失败信息，其中，所述资源配置失败信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示资源配置失败的第五信息，用于表示资源配置信息与DRX配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、所述第一DRX配置信息、所述第一 DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息或资源调整量。
  28. 根据权利要求19至26任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送第一信息，包括：
    所述第一通信设备向所述第三通信设备发送DRX配置请求信息；其中，所述
    DRX配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、所述第一资源配置信息、期望的DRX配置或DRX调整量。
  29. 根据权利要求19至26任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一信息，和向第三通信设备发送第二信息，包括：
    所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送资源配置失败信息，并向所述第三通信设备发送DRX配置请求信息。
  30. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源和第一业务；
    所述第一通信设备从所述第一候选资源中确定第一资源，所述第一资源与第一激活期在时域上存在交集，所述第一激活期是根据所述第一业务对应的非连续接收DRX激活期确定的。
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备从所述第一候选资源中确定第一资源，包括：
    所述第一通信设备将所述第一候选资源中在时域上与所述第一激活期存在交集的资源确定为第二候选资源；
    所述第一通信设备从所述第二候选资源中确定所述第一资源。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备将所述第一候选资源中在时域上与所述第一激活期存在交集的资源确定为第二候选资源，包括：
    所述第一通信设备将所述第一候选资源中在时域上包含于所述第一激活期的资源确定为第二候选资源。
  33. 根据权利要求30至32任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备选择第二业务，所述第二业务对应的DRX激活期与所述第一资源在时域上存在交集。
  34. 根据权利要求30至33任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    若所述第一资源与第一通信设备的第三业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，则所述第一通信设备触发资源重选。
  35. 根据权利要求30至34任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备将第一业务对应的DRX配置中满足第二条件的DRX周期确定为第一周期，所述第一周期为所述第一资源对应的周期。
  36. 根据权利要求30至35任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备确定所述第一激活期；
    所述第一通信设备在所述第一激活期内监听侧链路控制信息SCI，所述SCI用于指示其他通信设备用于侧链路传输的资源；
    所述第一通信设备根据所述SCI，在所述第一激活期内进行测量。
  37. 根据权利要求30至35任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第二资源；
    所述第一通信设备从所述第二资源中确定出所述第一候选资源，所述第一候选资源满足以下至少一个条件：
    在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集，所述第一业务包括当前业务和/或历史业务；
    在时域上与所述当前业务及所述历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集。
  38. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第三资源；
    若所述第三资源与所述第一通信设备的第四业务对应的非连续接收DRX激活期不存在交集，则所述第一通信设备触发资源重选。
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三资源与第四业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，包括：
    所述第三资源与所述第四业务对应的多个DRX激活期的并集不存在交集；或者，
    所述第三资源与所述第四业务对应的多个DRX激活期中的至少一个DRX激活期不存在交集；或者，
    所述第三资源与所述第四业务对应的多个DRX激活期中满足预设数量的DRX激活期不存在交集。
  40. 根据权利要求38或39所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第四业务对应的DRX激活期包括以下至少一个：通信目标对应的DRX激活期、侧链路连接对应的DRX激活期、源和目标对对应的DRX激活期、侧链路链接对应的DRX激活期、逻辑信道对应的DRX激活期、资源池对应的DRX激活期、侧链路业务对应的DRX激活期、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU对应的DRX激活期、传输块TB对应的DRX激活期。
  41. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一通信设备确定第二激活期，所述第二激活期为至少一个非连续接收DRX配置中DRX激活期在时域上的并集；
    所述第一通信设备在所述第二激活期内监听侧链路控制信息SCI，所述SCI用于指示其他通信设备用于侧链路传输的资源；
    所述第一通信设备根据所述SCI，在所述第二激活期内进行测量。
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个DRX配置包括第一业务的DRX配置。
  43. 根据权利要求42所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一业务包括以下至少一个：通信目标、侧链路连接、源和目标对、侧链路链接、逻辑信道、资源池、侧链路业务、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU、传输块TB。
  44. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一通信设备确定用于侧链路传输的第四资源；
    所述第一通信设备从所述第四资源中确定出第三候选资源，所述第三候选资源满 足以下至少一个条件：
    在时域上与第一业务对应的非连续接收DRX激活期的并集存在交集，所述第一业务包括当前业务和/或历史业务；
    在时域上与所述当前业务及所述历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；
    其中，所述第三候选资源用于确定用于侧链路传输的第五资源。
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一业务对应的DRX激活期包括以下至少一个：通信目标对应的DRX激活期、侧链路连接对应的DRX激活期、源和目标对对应的DRX激活期、侧链路链接对应的DRX激活期、逻辑信道对应的DRX激活期、资源池对应的DRX激活期、侧链路业务对应的DRX激活期、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU对应的DRX激活期、传输块TB对应的DRX激活期。
  46. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一通信设备确定第一资源池或所述第一资源池中的资源满足第三条件，所述第一资源池是所述第一通信设备当前进行资源选择的资源池；
    所述第一通信设备进行非连续接收DRX配置，和/或指示第二通信设备进行DRX配置，所述第一通信设备与所述第二通信设备之间进行侧链路通信。
  47. 根据权利要求46所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三条件包括以下至少一个：
    所述当前资源池的信道拥塞率CBR满足第四条件；
    所述CRB满足第四条件的次数达到第一阈值；
    所述第一通信设备触发资源池重选；
    所述第一通信设备触发资源池重选的次数达到第二阈值；
    所述第二通信设备的丢包率满足第五条件或所述第二通信设备的丢包率满足第五条件的次数达到第三阈值。
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第四条件包括：所述CBR大于第一预设值，或者所述CBR位于第一预设区间内；和/或，
    所述第五条件包括：所述丢包率大于第二预设值，或者所述丢包率位于第二预设区间内。
  49. 根据权利要求46至48任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一通信设备指示第二通信设备进行DRX配置，包括：
    所述第一通信设备向第二通信设备发送第一指示消息，所述第一指示消息用于向所述第二通信设备通知所述第一通信设备的当前资源池或所述当前资源池中的资源满足第三条件；或者，
    所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送第二指示消息，所述第二指示消息用于指示所述第二通信设备进行DRX配置；和/或，
    所述第一通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送第三指示消息，所述第三指示消息用于指示DRX配置信息。
  50. 根据权利要求46至49任一项所述的方法，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一通信设备接收来自所述第二通信设备的第四指示消息，所述第四指示消 息用于指示丢包率或者所述丢包率满足所述第五条件。
  51. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：发送模块；
    所述发送模块用于若第一非连续接收DRX配置信息与第一资源配置信息不匹配，则向第二通信设备发送第一信息，和/或向第三通信设备发送第二信息；
    其中，所述第一DRX配置信息用于所述通信装置对应的第一侧链路，所述第一资源配置信息用于所述通信装置对应的第二侧链路，所述第一信息用于指示所述第二通信设备为所述第一侧链路进行DRX配置，所述第二信息用于指示所述第三通信设备为所述第二侧链路进行资源配置。
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一DRX配置信息与所述第一资源配置信息不匹配，包括：所述第一DRX配置信息所指示的DRX激活时段与所述第一资源配置信息所指示的时域区间在至少一个时间段内存在冲突。
  53. 根据权利要求51或52所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一DRX配置信息所指示的DRX激活时段与所述第一资源配置信息所指示的时域区间在一个时间段内存在冲突，包括：n个所述DRX激活时段与所述时域区间重叠的时隙数小于预设阈值，n为正整数。
  54. 根据权利要求53所述的装置，其特征在于，所述n个所述DRX激活时段与所述时域区间重叠的时隙数小于预设阈值，包括：所述重叠时隙数除以n倍的DRX激活期的时隙数小于所述预设阈值。
  55. 根据权利要求51至54任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一资源配置信息为所述通信装置当前的资源配置信息；所述装置还包括：接收模块和匹配模块；
    所述接收模块用于接收来自所述第二通信设备的所述第一DRX配置信息；
    所述匹配模块用于确定所述第一DRX配置信息与所述第一资源配置信息不匹配。
  56. 根据权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为发送终端设备，所述第二通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第三通信设备为所述发送终端设备所属的网络设备。
  57. 根据权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第三通信设备为所述接收终端设备所属的网络设备。
  58. 根据权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为接收终端设备，所述第三通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第二通信设备为所述接收终端设备所属的网络设备；所述第一资源配置信息包括用于指示所述通信装置进行感知的资源配置信息。
  59. 根据权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为辅助用户设备，所述第二通信设备为所述辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为被辅助用户设备，所述第一资源配置包括用于指示所述通信装置进行感知的资源配置信息。
  60. 根据权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第三通信设备为所述接收终端设备所属的网络设备；所述第一资源配置信息用于所述通信装置在与第四通信设备之间的第二侧链路上发送侧链路数据。
  61. 根据权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为所述接收终端设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为发送终端设备。
  62. 根据权利要求55所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为被辅助用户设备，所述第二通信设备为所述被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为辅助用户设备。
  63. 根据权利要求55至62任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送模块用于：
    向所述第三通信设备发送模式切换请求信息，所述模式切换请求信息用于请求所述第三通信设备将所述通信装置的资源分配模式由第一模式切换为第二模式；或，
    向所述第三通信设备发送资源配置请求信息；其中，所述资源配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、所述第一DRX配置信息、所述第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息或资源调整量。
  64. 根据权利要求55至62任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送模块用于：
    向所述第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息；
    其中，所述DRX配置失败信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置失败的第三信息、所述DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、不允许所述第二通信设备为所述通信装置配置DRX的有效时长、所述第一资源配置信息、期望的DRX配置信息、DRX调整量以及对应的标识信息。
  65. 根据权利要求64所述的装置，其特征在于，所述接收模块用于：接收所述第三通信设备发送的所述DRX配置失败信息；所述发送模块用于向所述第二通信设备发送所述DRX配置失败信息；或，
    所述装置还包括定时器，所述定时器用于在所述发送模块向所述第三通信设备发送所述资源配置请求信息后启动定时器；所述发送模块还用于当所述定时器超时且所述通信装置未收到所述第三通信设备发送的资源配置信息时，向所述第二通信设备发送所述DRX配置失败信息。
  66. 根据权利要求64或65所述的装置，其特征在于，所述DRX配置失败信息还用于触发所述第二通信设备向所述第二通信设备所属的网络设备发送第四信息，所述第四信息用于指示所述第一侧链路对应的DRX配置失败。
  67. 根据权利要求64至66任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述标识信息包括以下至少一个：目标标识、源标识、侧链路连接标识、源和目标标识对、侧链路链接标识、逻辑信道标识、资源池标识、侧链路业务标识、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU标识、传输块TB标识。
  68. 根据权利要求55至62任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送模块用于：
    向所述第三通信设备发送资源配置请求信息，并向所述第二通信设备发送DRX配置失败信息。
  69. 根据权利要求51至54任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一DRX配置信息为所述通信装置当前的DRX配置信息；所述接收模块还用于：接收来自所述第三通信设备 的所述第一资源配置信息；
    所述匹配模块用于确定所述第一DRX配置信息与所述第一资源配置信息不匹配。
  70. 根据权利要求69所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为发送终端设备，所述第二通信设备为接收终端设备，所述第三通信设备为发送终端设备所属的网络设备。
  71. 根据权利要求69所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第三通信设备为所述接收终端所属的网络设备。
  72. 根据权利要求69所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为所述接收终端设备所述的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为发送终端设备；所述第一资源配置信息包括用于指示所述通信装置进行感知的资源配置信息。
  73. 根据权利要求69所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为被辅助用户设备，所述第二通信设备为被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为辅助用户设备，所述第一资源配置信息包括用于指示所述通信装置进行感知的资源配置信息。
  74. 根据权利要求69所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为发送终端设备，所述第三通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备；所述第一资源配置信息用于所述通信装置在与第四通信设备之间的第二侧链路上发送侧链路数据。
  75. 根据权利要求69所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为接收终端设备，所述第二通信设备为接收终端设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为发送终端设备。
  76. 根据权利要求75所述的装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置为被辅助用户设备，所述第二通信设备为所述被辅助用户设备所属的网络设备，所述第三通信设备为辅助用户设备。
  77. 根据权利要求69至76任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送模块用于：
    向所述第三通信设备发送模式切换请求信息，所述模式切换请求信息用于请求所述第三通信设备将所述通信装置的资源分配模式由第一模式切换为第二模式并按照所述第二模式为所述通信装置配置资源；或，
    向所述第三通信设备发送资源配置失败信息，其中，所述资源配置失败信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示资源配置失败的第五信息，用于表示资源配置信息与DRX配置信息不匹配的配置失败类型、所述第一DRX配置信息、所述第一DRX配置信息对应的标识信息、期望的资源配置信息或资源调整量。
  78. 根据权利要求69至76任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：
    向所述第三通信设备发送DRX配置请求信息；其中，所述DRX配置请求信息包括以下至少一种：用于表示DRX配置信息与资源配置信息不匹配的请求原因、所述第一资源配置信息、期望的DRX配置或DRX调整量。
  79. 根据权利要求69至76任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述发送模块还用于：
    向所述第二通信设备发送资源配置失败信息，并向所述第三通信设备发送DRX配 置请求信息。
  80. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：确定模块；
    所述确定模块用于确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源和第一业务；
    所述确定模块还用于从所述第一候选资源中确定第一资源，所述第一资源与第一激活期在时域上存在交集，所述第一激活期是根据所述第一业务对应的非连续接收DRX激活期确定的。
  81. 根据权利要求80所述的装置，其特征在于，所述确定模块用于：将所述第一候选资源中在时域上与所述第一激活期存在交集的资源确定为第二候选资源；从所述第二候选资源中确定所述第一资源。
  82. 根据权利要求81所述的装置，其特征在于，所述确定模块用于：
    将所述第一候选资源中在时域上包含于所述第一激活期的资源确定为第二候选资源。
  83. 根据权利要求80至82任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括：选择模块；
    所述选择模块用于选择第二业务，所述第二业务对应的DRX激活期与所述第一资源在时域上存在交集。
  84. 根据权利要求80至83任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述装置还包括触发模块；
    所述触发模块用于若所述第一资源与通信装置的第三业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，则触发资源重选。
  85. 根据权利要求80至84任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述确定模块还用于：
    将第一业务对应的DRX配置中满足第二条件的DRX周期确定为第一周期，所述第一周期为所述第一资源对应的周期。
  86. 根据权利要求80至85任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，在所述通信装置确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源之前，所述确定模块还用于：确定所述第一激活期；
    所述通信装置还包括监听模块和测量模块；所述监听模块用于在所述第一激活期内监听侧链路控制信息SCI，所述SCI用于指示其他通信设备用于侧链路传输的资源；
    所述测量模块用于根据所述SCI，在所述第一激活期内进行测量。
  87. 根据权利要求80至85任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述确定模块用于，在所述通信装置确定用于侧链路传输的第一候选资源之前，确定用于侧链路传输的第二资源；从所述第二资源中确定出所述第一候选资源，所述第一候选资源满足以下至少一个条件：
    在时域上与第一业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集，所述第一业务包括当前业务和/或历史业务；
    在时域上与所述当前业务及所述历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集。
  88. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：确定模块和触发模块；
    所述确定模块，用于确定用于侧链路传输的第三资源；
    所述触发模块，用于若所述第三资源与所述通信装置的第四业务对应的非连续接收DRX激活期不存在交集，则触发资源重选。
  89. 根据权利要求88所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第三资源与第四业务对应的DRX激活期不存在交集，包括：
    所述第三资源与所述第四业务对应的多个DRX激活期的并集不存在交集；或者，
    所述第三资源与所述第四业务对应的多个DRX激活期中的至少一个DRX激活期不存在交集；或者，
    所述第三资源与所述第四业务对应的多个DRX激活期中满足预设数量的DRX激活期不存在交集。
  90. 根据权利要求88或89所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第四业务对应的DRX激活期包括以下至少一个：通信目标对应的DRX激活期、侧链路连接对应的DRX激活期、源和目标对对应的DRX激活期、侧链路链接对应的DRX激活期、逻辑信道对应的DRX激活期、资源池对应的DRX激活期、侧链路业务对应的DRX激活期、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU对应的DRX激活期、传输块TB对应的DRX激活期。
  91. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：确定模块、监听模块和测量模块；
    所述确定模块，用于确定第二激活期，所述第二激活期为至少一个非连续接收DRX配置中DRX激活期在时域上的并集；
    所述监听模块，用于在所述第二激活期内监听侧链路控制信息SCI，所述SCI用于指示其他通信设备用于侧链路传输的资源；
    所述测量模块，用于根据所述SCI，在所述第二激活期内进行测量。
  92. 根据权利要求91所述的装置，其特征在于，所述至少一个DRX配置包括第一业务的DRX配置。
  93. 根据权利要求92所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一业务包括以下至少一个：通信目标、侧链路连接、源和目标对、侧链路链接、逻辑信道、资源池、侧链路业务、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU、传输块TB。
  94. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：确定模块；
    所述确定模块用于确定用于侧链路传输的第四资源；从所述第四资源中确定出第三候选资源，所述第三候选资源满足以下至少一个条件：
    在时域上与第一业务对应的非连续接收DRX激活期的并集存在交集，所述第一业务包括当前业务和/或历史业务；
    在时域上与所述当前业务及所述历史业务中非周期业务对应的DRX激活期的并集存在交集；
    其中，所述第三候选资源用于确定用于侧链路传输的第五资源。
  95. 根据权利要求94所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一业务对应的DRX激活期包括以下至少一个：通信目标对应的DRX激活期、侧链路连接对应的DRX激活期、源和目标对对应的DRX激活期、侧链路链接对应的DRX激活期、逻辑信道对应的DRX激活期、资源池对应的DRX激活期、侧链路业务对应的DRX激活期、媒体接入控制层协议数据单元MAC PDU对应的DRX激活期、传输块TB对应的DRX激活期。
  96. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    确定模块，用于确定第一资源池或所述第一资源池中的资源满足第三条件，所述第一资源池是所述通信装置当前进行资源选择的资源池；
    所述配置模块用于进行非连续接收DRX配置，和/或指示模块用于指示第二通信设备进行DRX配置，所述通信装置与所述第二通信设备之间进行侧链路通信。
  97. 根据权利要求96所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第三条件包括以下至少一个：
    所述当前资源池的信道拥塞率CBR满足第四条件；
    所述CRB满足第四条件的次数达到第一阈值；
    所述通信装置触发资源池重选；
    所述通信装置触发资源池重选的次数达到第二阈值；
    所述第二通信设备的丢包率满足第五条件或所述第二通信设备的丢包率满足第五条件的次数达到第三阈值。
  98. 根据权利要求97所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第四条件包括：所述CBR大于第一预设值，或者所述CBR位于第一预设区间内；和/或，
    所述第五条件包括：所述丢包率大于第二预设值，或者所述丢包率位于第二预设区间内。
  99. 根据权利要求96至98任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述指示模块用于：
    向第二通信设备发送第一指示消息，所述第一指示消息用于向所述第二通信设备通知所述通信装置的当前资源池或所述当前资源池中的资源满足第三条件；或者，
    向所述第二通信设备发送第二指示消息，所述第二指示消息用于指示所述第二通信设备进行DRX配置；和/或，
    向所述第二通信设备发送第三指示消息，所述第三指示消息用于指示DRX配置信息。
  100. 根据权利要求96至99任一项所述的装置，所述装置还包括：接收模块；
    所述接收模块用于接收来自所述第二通信设备的第四指示消息，所述第四指示消息用于指示丢包率或者所述丢包率满足所述第五条件。
  101. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器和存储器；所述处理器与所述存储器耦合，所述处理器被配置为读取并执行存储器中的指令，以实现如权利要求1至50任一项所述的通信方法。
  102. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括：如权利要求101所述的通信装置。
  103. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序或指令，其特征在于，所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行如权利要求1至50中任一项所述的通信方法。
  104. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括指令，其特征在于，当所述指令被执行时执行如权利要求1至50中任一项所述的通信方法。
PCT/CN2021/094582 2020-05-20 2021-05-19 一种通信方法及装置 WO2021233328A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
BR112022023575A BR112022023575A2 (pt) 2020-05-20 2021-05-19 Método e aparelho de comunicação
EP21809284.9A EP4152831A4 (en) 2020-05-20 2021-05-19 COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS
US17/990,296 US20230082194A1 (en) 2020-05-20 2022-11-18 Communication method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010432864.6 2020-05-20
CN202010432864 2020-05-20
CN202011141177.5 2020-10-22
CN202011141177.5A CN113709912A (zh) 2020-05-20 2020-10-22 一种通信方法及装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/990,296 Continuation US20230082194A1 (en) 2020-05-20 2022-11-18 Communication method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021233328A1 true WO2021233328A1 (zh) 2021-11-25

Family

ID=78646743

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/094582 WO2021233328A1 (zh) 2020-05-20 2021-05-19 一种通信方法及装置

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20230082194A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4152831A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN113709912A (zh)
BR (1) BR112022023575A2 (zh)
WO (1) WO2021233328A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024082257A1 (en) * 2022-10-21 2024-04-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Discontinuous reception with implicit indication in sidelink

Families Citing this family (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220070965A1 (en) * 2020-08-31 2022-03-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Sidelink discontinuous reception(sl drx) for quality of service (qos) and power saving
WO2022086280A1 (ko) * 2020-10-22 2022-04-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Nr v2x에서 sl drx 동작을 수행하는 방법 및 장치
US12022435B2 (en) * 2020-11-25 2024-06-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Radio (NR) sidelink (SL) channel access using virtual collision metric
KR102495498B1 (ko) * 2021-07-16 2023-02-06 엘지전자 주식회사 Nr v2x에서 sl 자원을 기반으로 무선 통신을 수행하는 방법 및 장치
US20230072971A1 (en) * 2021-09-03 2023-03-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and apparatuses for configuring discontinued reception in sidelink communication
CN114365581B (zh) * 2021-12-17 2024-04-12 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种确定直连链路非连续接收配置的方法及其装置
CN116455539A (zh) * 2022-01-10 2023-07-18 维沃移动通信有限公司 旁链路资源选择方法及装置
WO2023206335A1 (en) * 2022-04-29 2023-11-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Sidelink resource reservation in a shared band
WO2024031374A1 (zh) * 2022-08-09 2024-02-15 北京小米移动软件有限公司 基于侧行链路的设备间协作方法、装置、设备及存储介质

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2015176251A1 (zh) * 2014-05-21 2015-11-26 华为技术有限公司 一种设备到设备d2d通信中的信号传输方法及装置
CN105917731A (zh) * 2014-02-24 2016-08-31 英特尔公司 用于优化和对准非连续接收配置的机制
CN107241786A (zh) * 2016-03-28 2017-10-10 电信科学技术研究院 一种进行通信配置的方法和设备
CN107306423A (zh) * 2016-04-25 2017-10-31 电信科学技术研究院 一种进行业务传输的方法和终端

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6736761B2 (ja) * 2016-08-12 2020-08-05 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド 無線通信システムにおいてカウンタを基盤として端末が自律的にリソースを再選択する方法及び装置
US11197286B2 (en) * 2017-08-08 2021-12-07 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Downlink control information monitoring method, terminal, and base station
US10834777B2 (en) * 2018-01-11 2020-11-10 Ofinnon, LLC Discontinuous reception and CSI
CN110972265B (zh) * 2018-09-28 2022-01-14 华为技术有限公司 一种资源确定方法及装置
KR102267185B1 (ko) * 2018-10-04 2021-06-21 아서스테크 컴퓨터 인코포레이션 무선 통신 시스템에서 사이드 링크 재전송을 위한 리소스 요청 방법 및 장치
US11089549B2 (en) * 2018-10-12 2021-08-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Power-efficient DRX for multi-link communication
US11546743B2 (en) * 2018-11-02 2023-01-03 Intel Corporation NR V2X communications using sidelink bandwidth parts
EP3855860A1 (en) * 2020-01-21 2021-07-28 ASUSTek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus of handling device-to-device resource selection with consideration on discontinuous reception operation in a wireless communication system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105917731A (zh) * 2014-02-24 2016-08-31 英特尔公司 用于优化和对准非连续接收配置的机制
WO2015176251A1 (zh) * 2014-05-21 2015-11-26 华为技术有限公司 一种设备到设备d2d通信中的信号传输方法及装置
CN107241786A (zh) * 2016-03-28 2017-10-10 电信科学技术研究院 一种进行通信配置的方法和设备
CN107306423A (zh) * 2016-04-25 2017-10-31 电信科学技术研究院 一种进行业务传输的方法和终端

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024082257A1 (en) * 2022-10-21 2024-04-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Discontinuous reception with implicit indication in sidelink

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4152831A4 (en) 2023-11-15
EP4152831A1 (en) 2023-03-22
BR112022023575A2 (pt) 2023-02-07
US20230082194A1 (en) 2023-03-16
CN113709912A (zh) 2021-11-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021233328A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
US10536949B2 (en) Power efficient resource utilization for V2X communications
CN109804691B (zh) 一种数据传输方法及装置、计算机存储介质
WO2016165387A1 (zh) 调度控制方法、通信节点和计算机存储介质
CN113766640A (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2022077519A1 (zh) 一种信息传输方法及装置
CN113596963A (zh) 通信方法及装置
CN114246017A (zh) 用于无线通信系统的非连续接收操作
WO2022022496A1 (zh) 旁链路资源选择方法及终端
WO2021244256A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、装置及系统
WO2022151401A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、终端装置及系统
CN117356162A (zh) 在侧链通信中降低延迟并节省功率
CN115190617A (zh) 用于资源确定的方法及装置
WO2022152075A1 (zh) 资源选择方法、省电处理方法、装置及设备
WO2022205437A1 (zh) 部分侦听的资源选择方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN117480830A (zh) 通信系统中通过侧链路ue间协作的资源分配的方法和装置
CN117044335A (zh) 资源重选方法、装置、设备及存储介质
WO2023000233A1 (zh) 资源重选方法、装置、设备及存储介质
WO2022193282A1 (zh) 资源选取方法、装置、设备及存储介质
WO2022062973A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、装置及系统
WO2021212475A1 (zh) 数据传输方法及装置
WO2022028466A1 (zh) 配置方法及装置
WO2023010257A1 (zh) 侧行通信方法、装置、设备及存储介质
WO2022152120A1 (zh) 传输配置方法、装置及相关设备
WO2022077518A1 (zh) 一种资源选择方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21809284

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

DPE1 Request for preliminary examination filed after expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed from 20040101)
REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112022023575

Country of ref document: BR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202237072784

Country of ref document: IN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021809284

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20221215

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112022023575

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20221118